2024 OWNER’S MANUAL
2024 TONALE
Fourth Edition
24_GC_GH_OM_EN_USC
©2023 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A.,
used with permission. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of your Alfa Romeo brand
vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google
Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “Alfa Romeo” (U.S. residents only).
USA
alfaromeousa.com/
owners/owners-service-manual
Canada
alfaromeo.ca/en/
owners/owners-service-manual
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
DID_5666916_24b_Tonale_ICE_PHEV_OM_EN_070223.indd 1DID_5666916_24b_Tonale_ICE_PHEV_OM_EN_070223.indd 1 7/2/2023 5:46:55 PM7/2/2023 5:46:55 PM
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This
manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them
on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o󰀨-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine
except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-855-299-1368 OR VISIT ALFAROMEO.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and conditions of use, that are
determined solely by FCA US LLC.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any
device or feature that may take their attention o󰀨 the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers,
portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious
accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself unable to
devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o󰀨 the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit
the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Alfa Romeo
brand vehicle and to provide a
convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.alfaromeousa.com (USA),
www.alfaromeo.ca (Canada) or your local Alfa Romeo brand dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
Owner Handbook, Radio Instruction Manual and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 844-253-2872 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend,
or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
DID_5666916_24b_Tonale_ICE_PHEV_OM_EN_070223.indd 2DID_5666916_24b_Tonale_ICE_PHEV_OM_EN_070223.indd 2 7/2/2023 5:46:55 PM7/2/2023 5:46:55 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION........................................................................... 7 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE.................................................. 15 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .................................. 79 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING .......................................................... 98 4
5 MULTIMEDIA ........................................................................... 149 5
6 SAFETY.................................................................................. 169 6
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ............................................................ 210 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ................................................... 230 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................... 273 9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ............................................................. 278
10
11 INDEX ................................................................................... 284
11
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY ....................... 8
ROLLOVER WARNING ..................8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .......9
SYMBOL GLOSSARY ................... 9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY ................15
Battery Conditioning ................16
Regenerative Braking System (RBS) .......16
E-Selec Mode .................... 17
HIGH VOLTAGE CHARGING OPERATION ....... 18
SAE J1772 Charging Inlet ............. 18
AC Level 1 Charging (120 Volt, 12 Amp) ..... 18
AC Level 2 Charging (240 Volt, 40 Amp) ..... 25
Charging Times ................... 25
Vehicle Charge Indicators .............26
Hybrid Electric Pages ................29
KEYS ........................... 31
KeyFobs ......................31
SENTRY KEY ....................... 34
IGNITION SWITCH ....................35
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition ........... 35
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition — PHEV Only . . . 36
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED ............37
How To Use Remote Start .............38
To Exit Remote Start Mode ............ 38
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped .....................38
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . 39
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped .............. 39
Remote Start Abort Message — If Equipped . . . 39
Scheduled Cabin Conditioning (SCC) —
If Equipped (PHEV Only) ..............39
DOORS .......................... 40
Manual Door Locks .................40
Power Door Locks ................. 41
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry ...... 41
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ....... 43
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit ......... 43
Dead Lock Device — If Equipped ......... 43
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ..................... 44
STEERING WHEEL ................... 44
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ......... 44
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 45
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED ....45
Programming The Memory Feature ........ 45
Memory Position Recall .............. 45
SEATS........................... 46
Manual Adjustment Rear Seats .......... 46
Power Adjustment Front Seats ..........46
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped ........47
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......48
Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped .........48
Head Restraints .................. 49
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS —
IF EQUIPPED .......................50
Introducing Voice Recognition ........... 50
Basic Voice Commands .............. 50
Get Started ..................... 50
Additional Information ...............51
MIRRORS ........................ 51
InsideRearviewMirror ...............51
IlluminatedVanityMirrors ............. 51
Outside Mirrors ...................
51
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
If Equipped ..................... 51
Power Adjustment Mirrors ............ 52
FoldingMirrors ................... 52
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .......... 53
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED ............. 53
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . . 53
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ...... 53
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or
Non-Rolling Code Device .............. 53
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener ........................54
Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous
Device ........................ 54
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button . . 55
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ..... 55
Security ....................... 55
Troubleshooting Tips ................ 56
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ................... 56
Multifunction Lever ................ 56
Headlight Switch .................. 56
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If Equipped . 57
High/Low Beam Switch .............. 57
Automatic High Beam Headlights —
If Equipped ..................... 57
Flash-To-Pass ....................57
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ....... 57
2
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers —
If Equipped ..................... 57
Headlight Delay ..................58
Lights-On Reminder ................ 58
Rear Fog Lights — If Equipped .......... 58
Cornering Lights — If Equipped ..........58
Turn Signals .................... 58
Lane Change Assist ................ 58
Battery Saver Feature ............... 58
INTERIOR LIGHTS ....................59
Interior Courtesy Lights .............. 59
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ........ 60
Windshield Wiper Operation ............ 60
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ....... 61
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ........... 62
CLIMATE CONTROLS ..................62
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ......................62
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...... 65
Climate Voice Commands ............. 65
Operating Tips ................... 65
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ........ 66
Storage ....................... 66
USB Control ..................... 67
Power Outlets — If Equipped ........... 68
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ...... 69
WINDOWS ........................ 70
Power Window Controls .............. 70
Automatic Window Features ...........70
Power Window System Initialization ....... 70
Window Lockout Switch .............. 71
WindBuffeting ...................71
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .......... 71
Opening And Closing The Sunroof ........ 71
Opening And Closing The Power Sunshade . . . 72
Pinch Protect Feature ............... 72
Re-Initialization Procedure ............. 72
Sunroof Maintenance ............... 73
HOOD ...........................73
Opening The Hood ................. 73
Closing The Hood ..................73
LIFTGATE .........................74
Unlock/Open The Liftgate ............. 74
Lock/Close The Liftgate .............. 74
Power Liftgate — If Equipped ........... 75
Adjustable Power Liftgate Height ......... 76
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped ........76
Cargo Area Features ................ 77
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ................79
Instrument Cluster Descriptions ......... 80
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ........... 80
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls .......................80
Oil Change Reset .................. 82
Stop Safely And Leave The Vehicle As Soon As
Possible .......................82
Electric Mode Temporarily Unavailable ..... 83
Fuel And Oil Refresh Mode ............ 83
Power Steering Check Message ......... 84
Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped ..... 84
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items .....84
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped ............... 86
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .......... 87
Red Warning Lights .................87
Yellow Warning Lights ............... 90
Yellow Indicator Lights ............... 94
Green Indicator Lights ...............94
White Indicator Lights ............... 95
Blue Indicator Lights ................ 95
Gray Indicator Lights ................ 95
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ...... 96
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .................... 96
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS .......................96
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GAS ............98
Normal Starting ...................98
Extended Park Starting ..............99
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine .... 99
If Engine Fails To Start ..............99
Stopping The Engine ................ 99
STARTING THE VEHICLE — PHEV .......... 100
Normal Starting .................. 100
After Starting ................... 101
To Turn Off The Vehicle Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button ................ 101
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 101
PARK BRAKE ...................... 101
Electric Park Brake (EPB) ............ 101
3
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .............104
IgnitionParkInterlock ..............105
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System ....................... 105
6-SPEED OR 9-SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION .................. 105
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) ..............108
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) .........108
ALFA DNA SELECTOR — GAS ............. 109
Alfa DNA System ................. 109
Driving Modes ................... 109
ALFA DNA SELECTOR — HYBRID .......... 110
Alfa DNA System ................. 110
Driving Modes ................... 110
ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION (AAS) — IF EQUIPPED . 111
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED........111
AutostopMode .................. 111
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop ......................112
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . 112
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . 112
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . . 112
System Malfunction ............... 112
ACTIVE SPEED LIMITER — IF EQUIPPED ...... 113
Activation ..................... 113
Exceeding The Set Speed ............ 113
Deactivation .................... 113
INTELLIGENT SPEED ASSIST (ISA) —
IF EQUIPPED ...................... 114
Activation ..................... 114
Sign Capture Modes ...............114
Exceeding The Set Speed ............ 114
Deactivation .................... 114
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS ............. 114
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .......... 114
TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION — IF EQUIPPED . . . 120
Activation/Deactivation ............. 120
Traffic Sign Recognition Modes ......... 120
Indications On The Display ............ 121
INTELLIGENT ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED ...................... 121
Activation/Deactivation ............. 121
ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . 122
Operation ..................... 122
Turning Active Driving Assist On Or Off ..... 122
Indications On The Display ............124
Minimum Risk Maneuver ............ 124
System Status ................... 125
System Operation/Limitations .......... 125
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ............... 125
ParkSense Sensors ................ 125
ParkSense Warning Display ...........126
ParkSense Display ................ 126
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ....... 126
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . 126
Cleaning The ParkSense System ........ 126
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ..... 127
Side Distance Warning (SDW) System .....127
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ......................129
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System ............ 129
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation ............... 130
Exiting The Parking Space ............ 132
LANESENSE
— IF EQUIPPED .............133
LaneSense Operation ..............133
Turning LaneSense On Or Off .......... 134
LaneSense Warning Message ..........134
Changing LaneSense Status ........... 135
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ........135
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ......................136
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GAS .......... 138
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — PHEV (IF EQUIPPED) . 139
VEHICLE LOADING ................... 141
Certification Label ................141
TRAILER TOWING ................... 142
CommonTowingDefinitions ...........142
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) .................. 143
Trailer And Tongue Weight ............ 144
Towing Requirements .............. 144
TowingTips .................... 146
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) ...............146
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . 146
Recreational Towing ...............147
DRIVING TIPS ......................147
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..........147
Driving Through Water .............. 147
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .................149
CYBERSECURITY ................... 149
UCONNECT SETTINGS .................149
Customer Programmable Features ....... 149
4
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED ...................... 166
Steering Wheel Rotary Control .......... 166
Controls on Central Tunnel ............ 166
MYCAR......................... 166
PERFORMANCE PAGES ................167
Technical Gauges ................. 167
Consumption History — If Equipped .......167
Accessory Gauges ................ 168
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ..... 168
Regulatory And Safety Information ....... 168
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES................... 169
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........169
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System .... 169
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ............173
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . 173
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped ............. 176
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . 179
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........182
Occupant Restraint Systems Features .....182
Important Safety Precautions .......... 182
Seat Belt Systems ................ 182
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) .... 188
Child Restraints .................199
SAFETY TIPS ...................... 207
Transporting Passengers .............207
Transporting Pets ................. 207
Connected Vehicles ................208
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
TheVehicle .................... 208
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ............... 209
Exhaust Gas ...................209
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ........... 209
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........210
SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ............210
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED . . 213
Preparations For Jacking ............ 213
Jack And Tools Location/Spare Tire Stowage —
If Equipped ....................213
Jacking Instructions ............... 214
TIRE INFLATOR KIT — IF EQUIPPED ......... 217
Description ..................... 217
Inflation Procedure ................217
Checking And Restoring Tire Pressure ..... 219
Sealant Cartridge Replacement ......... 220
JUMP STARTING — GAS MODELS .......... 220
Preparations For Jump Start — Gas Models . . 220
Jump Starting Procedure — Gas Models .... 221
JUMP STARTING — HYBRID MODELS ........ 222
Preparations For Jump Start — Hybrid Models . 223
Jump Starting Procedure — Hybrid Models . . . 223
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY ............. 224
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............ 225
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ............. 225
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............226
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........227
Without The Key Fob ...............228
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models ......... 228
Tow Eye — If Equipped .............. 228
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ......................... 229
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ........... 229
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ............... 230
Maintenance Plan ................ 230
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ............... 232
1.3L PHEV Engine ................. 232
2.0L Engine .................... 233
Checking Oil Level ................234
Adding Washer Fluid ............... 234
Maintenance-Free Battery ............ 234
Pressure Washing ................. 235
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ............... 235
Engine Oil ..................... 235
Engine Oil Filter .................. 236
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .............236
Air Conditioner Maintenance .......... 237
Body Lubrication ................. 238
Wiper Blades ................... 238
Exhaust System ................. 239
Cooling System ..................240
Brake System ...................243
Automatic Transmission ............. 243
Fuses ....................... 244
Bulb Replacement ................ 257
TIRES .......................... 257
TireSafetyInformation .............257
Tires — General Information ........... 263
Tire Types ..................... 266
Spare Tires — If Equipped ............266
Tire Rotation Recommendations ........ 267
5
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ................ 268
Treadwear ..................... 268
Traction Grades ..................268
Temperature Grades ...............268
STORING THE VEHICLE — GAS ............ 269
STORING THE VEHICLE — PHEV ........... 269
BODYWORK....................... 270
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ......270
Body And Underbody Maintenance .......270
Preserving The Bodywork ............ 271
INTERIORS ....................... 271
Seats And Fabric Parts .............. 271
Plastic And Coated Parts .............272
Leather Surfaces .................272
Glass Surfaces .................. 272
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ...... 273
BRAKE SYSTEM .................... 273
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .... 273
Torque Specifications ............... 273
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ................. 274
1.3L Engine ....................274
2.0L Engine ....................274
Reformulated Gasoline ..............274
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...........274
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...... 274
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications .... 275
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) In Gasoline ................275
Materials Added To Fuel ............. 275
Fuel System Cautions ............... 275
FLUID CAPACITIES ...................276
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ......... 277
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ........ 277
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .....................278
Prepare For The Appointment .......... 278
Prepare A List ...................278
Be Reasonable With Requests .........278
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............278
Roadside Assistance ...............278
FCA US LLC Customer Center ..........279
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Care ........ 279
Alfa Romeo Customer Care
(Puerto Rico and US Virgin Islands) .......279
Mexico ....................... 279
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ........ 279
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ........... 279
Service Contract ................. 280
WARRANTY INFORMATION ..............280
MOPAR®PARTS ...................280
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............ 280
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . 280
In Canada ..................... 281
ORDERING AND ACCESSING ADDITIONAL
OWNER’S INFORMATION ............... 281
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS ...... 281
GENERAL INFORMATION ...............282
6
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
We would like to congratulate and thank you for the purchase of your Alfa Romeo.
We have written this Owner’s Manual to help you get to know all of the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. Please take the necessary time to familiarize
yourself with all the dynamic features of your vehicle.
Here you will find important information and warnings regarding the use of your vehicle, and how to achieve the best performance from the technical features of your Alfa Romeo.
You are advised to read through the Owner’s Manual before taking it on the road for the first time. It is important to become familiar with the controls of your vehicle, especially
with sections concerning the brakes, handling, transmission, and vehicle behavior on different road surfaces.
This Owner’s Manual also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care, and maintenance of your Alfa Romeo over
time.
Along with your Owner’s Manual, you will also find a description of the services that Alfa Romeo offers to its customers, the vehicle's warranty coverage, and the details of the
terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. These documents are meant to introduce the superior service provided by Alfa Romeo.
For questions or comments pertaining to your vehicle, please contact:
Alfa Romeo Customer Care Center:
P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI
48321–8004
Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA
(1-844-253-2872)
Alfa Romeo Customer Care (Canada):
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: 1-877-230-0563 (English)
Phone: 1-877-515-9112 (French)
7
1
SYMBOLS KEY
WARNING! These statements apply to operating pro-
cedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION! These statements apply to procedures
that could result in damage to your
vehicle.
NOTE: A suggestion which will improve installa-
tion, operation, and reliability. If not fol-
lowed, may result in damage.
TIP: General ideas/solutions/suggestions on
easier use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional infor-
mation on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many pas-
senger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applica-
tions. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the
higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other
vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that
can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe
or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce
disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-
nificantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
Rollover Warning Label
8 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthi-
ness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when oper-
ating your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol
page 87.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
page 87
Brake Warning Light
page 88
Battery Charge Warning Light
page 88
Red Warning Lights
Door Open Warning Light
page 88
Drowsy Driver Detected Warning Light
page 88
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
page 88
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
page 89
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
page 89
Hood Open Warning Light
page 89
INTRODUCTION 9
1
Red Warning Lights
Liftgate Open Warning Light
page 89
Oil Pressure Warning Light
page 89
Oil Temperature Warning Light
page 89
Plug Status Fault Warning Light
page 89
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
page 90
Service Hybrid System Warning Light
page 90
Red Warning Lights
SOS Battery Fail Warning Light
page 90
Traction Battery Fault Warning Light
page 90
Torque Limited Warning Light
page 90
Transmission Fault Warning Light
page 90
Vehicle Security Warning Light
page 90
Yellow Warning Lights
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System (AVAS) Fault Warning Light
page 90
10 INTRODUCTION
Yellow Warning Lights
Active Speed Limiter Fault Indicator Light
page 91
Auto Liftgate Fault Indicator Light
page 90
Blind Spot Detection Fault Warning Light
page 91
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
page 91
Drowsy Driver Detected System Fault Warning Light
page 91
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
page 91
Yellow Warning Lights
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
page 91
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
page 91
Fuel Cutoff Warning Light
page 91
Fuel Cutoff Failure Warning Light
page 91
Fuel Level Sensor Failure Warning Light
page 91
Lane Keep Assist Warning Light
page 91
INTRODUCTION 11
1
Yellow Warning Lights
Service Lane Keep Assist Warning Light
page 92
Low Fuel Warning Light
page 92
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator (MIL) Warning Light
page 92
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™/Service Passive Entry Warning Light
page 92
Rain Sensor Failure Light
page 92
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
page 92
Yellow Warning Lights
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
page 92
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
page 92
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light
page 93
PHEV Traction Battery Cut-off Warning Light
page 93
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) Fault Warning Light
page 93
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
page 93
12 INTRODUCTION
Yellow Indicator Lights
Exterior Lights Failure Indicator Light
page 94
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light
page 94
Icy Road Condition Indicator Light
page 94
Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm Indicator Light
page 94
Green Indicator Lights
Active Speed Limiter SET Indicator Light
page 113
Hold ‘n Go Indicator Light
page 94
Green Indicator Lights
Auto Low Beams Indicator Light
page 94
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
page 94
Ready To Drive Indicator Light
page 95
Plug Status Indicator Light
page 94
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
page 95
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
page 95
INTRODUCTION 13
1
Green Indicator Lights
E-Boost Engaged Indicator Light
page 95
E-Drive Electric Mode Indicator Light
page 95
White Indicator Lights
Auto High Beams Active Indicator Light
page 95
Auto Low Beams Indicator Light
page 95
E-Boost Available Indicator Light
page 95
Idle Coasting Indicator Light
page 95
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beams Indicator Light
page 95
Auto High Beams Active Indicator Light
page 95
Gray Indicator Lights
E-Boost Unavailable Indicator Light
page 95
14 INTRODUCTION
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a Lithium-ion high voltage
battery that is used to power the electric powertrain
systems and the 12 Volt vehicle electrical system.
The high voltage battery is located underneath the
vehicle.
Lithium-ion batteries provide the following benefits:
•
Lithium-ion batteries are much lighter than other
types of rechargeable batteries of the same size.
•
Lithium-ion batteries hold their charge; they only
lose approximately three percent of their charge per
month.
•
Lithium-ion batteries have no memory, which means
that you do not have to completely discharge them
before recharging, as with some other batteries.
•
Lithium-ion batteries can be recharged and dis-
charged thousands of times.
High Voltage Battery Service Disconnect
The high voltage battery service disconnect is located
under the load floor of the cargo area, at the front left
side. Only a qualified service technician should access
the high voltage battery service disconnect.
If your vehicle requires high voltage battery service, see
an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
•
Never try to remove the high voltage battery ser-
vice disconnect. The high voltage battery service
disconnect is used when your vehicle requires ser-
vice by a qualified technician at an authorized
dealership. Failure to follow this warning can result
in electrical shock, toxic emissions, fire, and other
hazards which can cause death or serious injury
including severe burns, respiratory injuries, and
blindness.
•
The high voltage battery and battery case have no
parts that you or an unqualified technician can
service. Under no circumstances should you or an
unqualified technician open, disassemble, pen-
etrate, or tamper with the high voltage battery, bat-
tery case, their cables, or connectors. Damage to
these components can result in electrical shock,
toxic emissions, fire, and other hazards which can
cause death or serious injury including severe
burns, respiratory injuries, and blindness. You
should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer-
ship for any service or maintenance on these high
voltage components.
•
The high voltage system can be hot during and
after starting, and when the vehicle is shut off or
charging. Be careful of both the high voltage and
the high temperature. Failure to do so can result in
severe burns.
Disposal of the High Voltage Battery
Your vehicle’s high voltage battery is designed to last
the life of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
information on the disposal of the battery if it should
require replacement.
WARNING!
Your vehicle contains a sealed Lithium-ion high voltage
battery. If the battery is disposed of improperly, there is
a risk of electrical shock and toxic emissions which can
cause severe burns, respiratory injuries, fires, and
other hazards resulting in serious injury or death.
General Information
The vehicle is also equipped with a Battery Manage-
ment system that is designed to:
•
Ensure safe operation
•
Maximize driving range
•
Maximize the life expectancy of the high voltage
battery
NOTE:
During vehicle start up and shut down, a clicking noise
may be heard from within the vehicle. When the vehicle
is preparing to start, the high voltage battery contactors
inside the battery are closed to make the stored elec-
tricity inside available for vehicle use. After the vehicle
is shut down, the contactors open to electrically isolate
the battery from other vehicle systems. The clicking
noise is the sound of these contactors as they open
and close during normal operation.
15
2
WARNING!
In the event of a collision:
•
If your vehicle is still drivable, pull off the road and
place the transmission in the PARK position, apply
the parking brake, and turn the vehicle off.
•
Check your vehicle to see if there are exposed
high-voltage parts or cables. To avoid electrical
stock which can result in serious injury or death,
never touch wiring, connectors, and other high-
voltage parts, such as the inverter unit and the
Lithium-ion battery.
•
If the vehicle receives a strong impact to the floor
while driving, stop the vehicle in a safe location
and check the floor.
•
Leaks or damage to the Lithium-ion battery may
result in a fire and toxic emissions which can
cause severe burns, respiratory injuries, and other
serious injuries or death. If you discover these
leaks, contact emergency services immediately.
Since the fluid leak may be Lithium Manganate
from the Lithium-ion battery, never touch the fluid
leak inside or outside of the vehicle. If the fluid
contacts your skin or eyes, wash these areas
immediately with a large amount of water and
obtain immediate medical attention to help avoid
serious injury.
•
If a fire occurs inside your vehicle, leave the
vehicle as soon as possible. Only use a type ABC,
BC, or C fire extinguisher that is meant for use on
electrical fires. Using a small amount of water, or
the incorrect fire extinguisher can result in serious
injury or death from electrical shock.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
If you are not able to safely assess the vehicle due
to vehicle damage, do not touch the vehicle. Leave
the vehicle and contact emergency services.
Advise first responders that this is a hybrid-electric
vehicle.
•
In the event of an accident that requires bodywork,
refer to an authorized dealership.
BATTERY CONDITIONING
In extreme temperatures, high or low, the high voltage
battery may need to be conditioned, and therefore may
require the vehicle to be plugged in prior to the next use
of the vehicle.
If the ambient temperature is 5°F (-15°C) or below at
vehicle shut down, the instrument cluster will display
the message “Plug In Vehicle To Condition Battery”.
If the battery temperature is below -22°F (-30°C), or
131°F (55°C) or above, the vehicle will NOT start:
•
If the vehicle is plugged in at these battery tempera-
tures, the vehicle will not start and the instrument
cluster will display the message “Please Leave Key
In RUN — Battery Conditioning Needed” until battery
conditioning is complete.
•
If the vehicle is not plugged in at these battery tem-
peratures, the vehicle will not start and the “Plug In
Vehicle To Condition Battery” message will be shown
in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
•
When the “Please Leave Key In RUN — Battery Con-
ditioning Needed” message is displayed, keep the
ignition in the RUN position for the battery to
recover. Place the ignition back in the OFF position
when the message disappears, and then start the
vehicle. When this message is displayed, do not
operate any air conditioning controls.
•
Under these high or low temperatures, while the
vehicle is plugged in and the ignition is in the OFF
position, the vehicle may “wake up” to precondition
the high voltage battery for use.
•
It is recommended that the vehicle be plugged in
overnight when possible, to maximize the electric
range of the vehicle.
The messages will only be displayed when the ignition
is in the RUN position and the high voltage battery is
not ready to provide propulsion power. The messages
will also display if there was a failed attempt to achieve
READY state when the high voltage battery cell tem-
peratures were either too cold, or too hot.
REGENERATIVE BRAKING SYSTEM
(RBS)
Your vehicle has a RBS. The RBS replenishes the vehi-
cle's high voltage battery during deceleration, and is
particularly useful in stop-and-go city traffic. The elec-
tric motors, which propel the vehicle forward, can oper-
ate as generators when braking. The RBS recharges the
high voltage battery under certain braking conditions by
recapturing energy that would otherwise be lost while
braking. The electric power that is generated goes back
into the high voltage battery for later use, for example
when acceleration is desired.
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The RBS uses conventional hydraulic friction brakes,
regenerative braking, or a combination to slow the
vehicle. If the system detects slippery conditions while
braking, ONLY friction is used to slow the vehicle. The
RBS can result in extended life of the hydraulic service
brakes; however, all inspection, scheduled mainte-
nance, and service intervals for the vehicle service
brakes must be followed.
Max Regeneration
Max Regeneration is a supplemental feature of the
RBS. When activated, it will use the RBS to help slow
the vehicle when the driver releases the accelerator
pedal. This feature allows you to moderately reduce
driving speed without pressing the brake pedal. It is
always necessary to apply the brake pedal to bring the
vehicle to a complete stop. The Driving History screen
shows the value of energy recovered from the high-
voltage battery during eCoasting and eBraking energy
recovery operations
page 29.
•
eCoasting: Intervenes in place of the exhaust brake
when the throttle is released, allowing energy recov-
ery when slowing down, even when the brake pedal
is released. It will differentiate depending on the
selected drive mode. When the accelerator pedal is
released, the system recovers energy during the
slowing down phase of the car. It is always active
regardless of the selected drive mode. eCoasting is
possible if the automatic transmission is in the Drive
position. While in “Sport” mode, eCoasting has a
more pronounced deceleration when the accelera-
tor pedal is released. When “Sport” mode is not
selected, eCoasting has a setting that favors driving
comfort.
•
eBraking: eBraking is always active regardless of
the selected operating mode, and activates the
high-voltage battery charging when the brake pedal
is pressed, thereby recovering energy during brak-
ing. It is useful when driving in the city, where there
are continuous stops and starts. To make the most
efficient use the system, the braking phase should
be modulated by applying gradual pressure on the
brake pedal to allow maximum energy recovery.
E-SELEC MODE
This system allows the driver to select different modes
by first pressing the e-Save button located below the
gear shifter. Once selected the different modes are cus-
tomizable in your touchscreen display.
•
Hybrid: Prioritizes electric range first, then gas
range.
○ Automatically switches between using gas and
battery for greatest efficiency and performance.
○ Best heating/cooling and acceleration
performance.
•
Electric: Prevents the engine from running, unless
you absolutely need it.
○ Driving in electric mode allows the vehicle to use
up to the full capability of the electric drivetrain,
and if the electric drivetrain is operating at its
peak power, then pressing the accelerator pedal
more will not result in more power. To access the
full capability of the engine plus electric motors,
switch to Hybrid or e-Save.
○ Engine will switch on during a Wide Open Throttle
(WOT) event, or if cruise control requires it.
○ Vehicle will switch to hybrid mode upon reaching
< 1% State of Charge (SOC) or due to system
needs. See
page 86 for information on where
to view your vehicle’s SOC.
•
e-Save: Aims to maintain a high level of SOC/Electric
range for later use. It can be customized in settings
to increase the SOC to predefined levels.
○ e-Save settings can be found in the Uconnect
Hybrid Electric App.
○ When e-Save is selected on a fully charged
vehicle, the SOC will drop slightly for optimal
performance.
○ The Battery Save setting aims to maintain the
SOC at the current level. Under heavy load, such
as while pulling a trailer, SOC may decrease.
When coasting, the SOC may increase.
○ The Battery Charge setting uses power from the
engine to increase SOC to the selected target. If
the SOC is above the target when e-Save mode is
activated, then the vehicle will automatically
switch between gas and battery until SOC
reaches the target.
○ The e-Save mode button must be pressed to acti-
vate Battery Save or Battery Charge.
E-Selec Mode Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
HIGH VOLTAGE CHARGING OPERATION
SAE J1772 CHARGING INLET
Your vehicle uses an industry standard SAE
J1772 charge inlet (vehicle charge inlet) for both AC
Level 1 (120 V) and AC Level 2 (240 V) charging.
Open the charge port door by pushing near the rear
outer edge of the door, near the center to unlatch. To
close the charge port door, engage the door latch by
pushing on the rear outer edge near the center.
AC LEVEL 1 CHARGING (120 VOLT,
12 AMP)
Your vehicle is equipped with a 120 Volt AC, SAE J1772
Level 1 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE), also
referred to as a Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). AC
Level 1 charging requires a conventional NEMA 5-15R
120 Volt AC grounded wall outlet along with the Por-
table Charging Cordset (EVSE) provided with the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Please be sure to follow the warnings below. Failure
to do so may result in serious injury or death.
•
Discontinue use of the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) immediately if the plug or outlet becomes
hot to the touch or if you notice any unusual odors.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
in building structures that use fuse-based circuit
protection. Use only with electrical circuits pro-
tected by circuit breakers.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if
other devices are plugged into the same circuit.
•
When unplugging the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) from the wall outlet, be sure to pull by the
plug, and not the cord.
•
Do not pull, twist, bend, step on or drag the cord of
the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE).
•
Stop using the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
immediately if charging stops before it’s completed
when the plug or cord is moved or adjusted.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if
the plug has a loose connection with the wall out-
let or if the wall outlet is damaged or rusted.
•
If in any doubt about the wall outlet and/or circuit,
contact a qualified electrician.
•
Do not use if a malfunction occurs or if the Por-
table Charging Cordset (EVSE) has been damaged
in any manner. It is recommended that you contact
an authorized dealership.
•
There are no user serviceable parts inside the Por-
table Charging Cordset (EVSE). Do not attempt to
repair or service the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE), doing so will void the New Vehicle Warranty.
WARNING!
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK: Electrical shock, fire, and other
serious hazards can occur if the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) is not used properly. This vehicle uses
a high voltage current. Failure to follow the proper
charging instructions in this publication can cause
serious injury or death. There are no serviceable
parts in the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Do not
open, disassemble, penetrate, or tamper with the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Failure to follow
this warning can result in electrical shock, fire, prop-
erty damage, and death or serious injury.
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is stored in the
rear cargo area below the load floor. To access this
area, lift the handle of the load floor cover, and remove
the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the storage
bag in the rear cargo area.
Vehicle Charge Inlet Location
Portable Charging Cor dset (EVSE)
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Moving, Transporting, And Storage Instructions
After use, the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) should
be placed in the storage bag and put back in the cargo
storage area. If the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
will be left outside the vehicle, be sure to protect the
device’s connection end from moisture, dirt, and debris
accumulation and contamination.
NOTE:
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is used for AC
Level 1 charging only.
WARNING!
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO
A RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK: This publica-
tion contains important instructions and warnings
that should be followed during charging operations.
Failure to follow these warnings and instructions can
result in electrical shock and fire which can cause
death or serious injury.
•
Read this entire publication before using the Por-
table Charging Cordset (EVSE).
•
Do not put fingers or objects into the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) connector.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if
the flexible power cord is frayed, broken, has
cracked insulation, or any other signs of damage.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if
the enclosure or the connector is broken, cracked,
open, or shows any other indication of damage.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
with an extension cord or plug adapters.
•
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) may attempt
to reset and run after a power interruption.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
There are no user serviceable parts inside the Por-
table Charging Cordset (EVSE). Do not attempt to
repair or service the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) yourself – personal injury may result.
•
When using a charging station with the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) attached, ensure the
charging station’s cable is not visibly damaged
before plugging into the vehicle.
•
Do not allow children to operate the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE). Adult supervision is man-
datory when children are in proximity to the charge
station that is in use.
•
Do not use a charge station or vehicle charge inlet
that is worn or damaged with the AC Level 2 charg-
ing cable. Plugging into worn or damaged recep-
tacles may cause damage to the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) and vehicle.
•
Ensure that the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
is always stored in a safe place. Do not expose the
EVSE J1772 vehicle connector to rain or wet condi-
tions. Avoid allowing water or other liquids to pour
or drip onto the vehicle connection end of the
J1772 EVSE connector. If water penetrates the
electrical device, the risk of electrical shock
increases. Ensure that all plugs and cables are
free of moisture before using the Portable Charg-
ing Cordset (EVSE).
•
In a collision, a loose Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) in the vehicle could cause injury. It could fly
around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the
vehicle. Do not store the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) on the cargo load floor, or in the passenger
compartment.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) has been
tested for use in temperatures ranging from -40°F
to 122°F (-40°C to 50°C).
•
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) should be
stored at temperatures between -40°F and 176°F
(-40°C and 80°C).
•
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is compliant with
SAE J1772, and applicable for use with vehicles fitted
with standard SAE J1772 charge inlets. The Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) includes:
•
A charge connector
•
A NEMA 6 rated enclosure with a Charge Current
Interrupt Device (CCID) with a status indicator
display
•
An AC Power Cord with a NEMA 5–15P right angle
plug
•
An indoor/outdoor charge cable, EV-rated
•
A Status Indicator Display
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
Grounding Instructions
For A Grounded, Cord-Connected Product:
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) must be
grounded. If it should malfunction or break down,
grounding provides a path of least resistance for an
electric current to reduce the risk of electric shock. The
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is equipped with a
cord having an equipment-grounding conductor and a
grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an
appropriate outlet that is properly installed and
grounded in accordance with all local codes and
ordinances.
WARNING!
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK: Do not use the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) on electrical circuits with two-prong
outlets; use with improper outlets could result in elec-
tric shock, fire, property damage, and death or seri-
ous injury. Check with a qualified electrician if you are
in doubt as to whether the wall outlet is properly
grounded. Do not modify the plug prongs provided
with the Portable Charging Corset (EVSE) – if it does
not fit the outlet, you must have a proper outlet
installed by a qualified electrician.
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
Installation And Operating Instructions
1. Always insert the AC plug prongs of the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) into a 15 A, or 20 A,
120 VAC, 60 Hz, grounded wall outlet first. Do not
use an extension cord, outlet/plug adapter, or a
worn outlet. The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
will not operate safely unless it is plugged directly
into the wall outlet.
NOTE:
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) should be
plugged into a dedicated circuit, not a circuit shared
with other devices drawing electricity on the circuit.
WARNING!
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK: Do not use the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) on electrical circuits with two-prong
outlets; use with improper outlets could result in elec-
tric shock, fire, property damage, and death or seri-
ous injury. Check with a qualified electrician if you are
in doubt as to whether the wall outlet is properly
grounded. Do not modify the plug prongs provided
with the Portable Charging Corset (EVSE) – if it does
not fit the outlet, you must have a proper outlet
installed by a qualified electrician.
Portable Charging Cor dset (EVSE)
1 — Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) Enclosure
2 — Charge Cable
3 — Charge Connector
4 — Status Indicator Display
5—ACPlug
AC Plug And Wall Outlet
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Check to see if the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) is ready to charge by reviewing the indicator
lights.
3. If the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is ready to
charge, ensure the vehicle is in PARK, and then con-
nect the charge connector to the vehicle’s charge
inlet. You will hear a “click” when the charge con-
nector is inserted correctly and coupled with the
vehicle’s charge inlet.
4. When the vehicle commences charging, the green
indicator light will turn on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should start charging automatically. If
not, please check the following:
○
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) — The Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) status indicator lights
illuminate green, red, or yellow to identify the
charging status
page 22.
○
Wall Outlet — Check whether the wall outlet is
functional (no power outage) and/or plug the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) into a different
wall outlet.
○
Charging Schedule — Check whether or not the
charging schedules have been enabled. If
enabled, check that you are within the scheduled
time and day of the week. If a charging schedule
has been enabled in the vehicle, and it is outside
the time and day of the week, you may override
the schedule for this charging event by plugging
in the charge connector, unplugging it, and then
plugging it back into the vehicle charge inlet.
Complete the double plug sequence within
10 seconds for it to override the set schedule.
○
Hood Ajar — Check whether the hood is open.
Charging is disabled while the hood is open, and
will resume when the hood closes.
5. To stop the charging process, disconnect the Por-
table Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the vehicle first,
and then from the wall outlet. To disengage the
vehicle coupler, push the button on the connector.
6. Close the inlet door when a Portable Charging Cord-
set (EVSE) is not connected to the vehicle.
Portable Charging Cor dset (EVSE) Indicator Lights
1 — Check Outlet Indicator Light
2 — Fault Indicator Light
3 — AC Power Indicator Light
Inserting The Charge Connector Into The Vehicle Charge
Inlet
Removing The Charge Connector From The Vehicle Charge
Inlet
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
NOTE:
It is good practice to keep the ignition in the OFF posi-
tion while conducting Level 1 charging. This minimizes
any additional vehicle loads the Portable Charging Cord-
set (EVSE) has to support. The additional electrical
loads will extend the high voltage battery charging time.
Troubleshooting Using The Status
Indicator Display
If the vehicle is not charging properly, consult the status
indicator lights.
The Green LED signals correct operation of the system.
The Red LED signals a failure in the charging system.
The Yellow LED signals a failure with the outlet.
Any faults in charging are displayed by the LEDs, either steady or flashing, located on the status indicator display of the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Refer to the following
troubleshooting table:
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) Charging System Failure Troubleshooting
Green LED Red LED Yellow LED Description Action/Consequences
OFF OFF OFF
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) not connected to the
domestic charging outlet or power failure in the
domestic power supply mains.
ON OFF OFF
There are no faults in the domestic power supply
mains, so the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) can be
connected to the charge inlet on the vehicle.
ON ON (Flashing) ON
Overheating at the charging outlet of the domestic
power supply mains.
When the normal temperature is reached, the system
will make a new charge attempt at a lower current
level.
LED Indicator Lights
1—YellowLED
2 — Red LED
3 — Green LED
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) Charging System Failure Troubleshooting
Green LED Red LED Yellow LED Description Action/Consequences
ON OFF ON (Flashing)
Charging to a lower current level due to overheating of
the charging outlet of the domestic power supply
mains.
ON ON ON (Flashing)
Overheating at the charging outlet of the domestic
power supply mains.
Carefully disconnect the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) from both the vehicle and power outlet and
wait for the plug and outlet to return to normal tem-
peratures. Then, reconnect the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) to the power outlet and vehicle and
charge again.
Contact a qualified electrician in case of a new anomaly.
ON ON (2 Blinks) ON (2 Blinks)
Lack of grounding cable in the charging outlet of the
domestic power supply mains.
The system will make a new charge attempt after
30 seconds (6 attempts in total).
ON ON ON (2 Blinks)
Lack of grounding cable in the charging outlet of the
domestic power supply mains.
The new charge attempt failed. Disconnect the Por-
table Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the vehicle and
the outlet and reconnect it, then try to charge again.
Contact a qualified electrician in case of a new
anomaly.
ON (Flashing) OFF OFF Domestic mains power incorrectly supplied.
The system will make a new charge attempt after
30 seconds (6 attempts total).
If the fault persists, disconnect the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) from the vehicle and the outlet and
reconnect it, then try to charge again.
Contact a qualified electrician in case of a new anomaly.
ON ON (Flashing) OFF
Charge Current Interrupt Device (CCID) fault trip over
one second after relay closure. Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) retrying to charge the vehicle.
The system will make a new charge attempt after
30 seconds (6 attempts in total).
ON ON OFF
Charge Current Interrupt Device (CCID) fault, Retry
Exhausted or Retry is disallowed if trips within one sec-
ond of relay closure.
The new charge attempt failed. Disconnect the Por-
table Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the vehicle and
the outlet and reconnect it, then try to charge again.
Contact an authorized dealership in case of a new
anomaly.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) Charging System Failure Troubleshooting
Green LED Red LED Yellow LED Description Action/Consequences
ON ON OFF Dispersion of the electricity on the vehicle.
Disconnect the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) from
the vehicle and the outlet and reconnect it, then try to
charge again.
Contact an authorized dealership in case of a new
anomaly.
ON ON (Flashing) OFF Electric charging current too high.
The system will make a new charge attempt after
30 seconds (6 attempts total).
ON ON (7 Blinks) OFF Electric charging current too high.
The new charge attempt failed. Disconnect the Por-
table Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the vehicle and
the outlet and reconnect it, then try to charge again.
Contact an authorized dealership in case of a new
anomaly.
ON ON (2 Blinks) OFF Charging abnormality on the vehicle.
The system will make a new charge attempt after
30 seconds (6 attempts total).
If the fault persists, disconnect the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) from the vehicle and the domestic
power outlet and reconnect it, then try to charge
again.
Contact an authorized dealership in case of a new
anomaly.
ON ON (3 Blinks) OFF
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) failure.
ON ON (4 Blinks) OFF
ON ON (5 Blinks) OFF
ON ON (6 Blinks) OFF
Guidelines for preventing fire and electric shock:
•
Ensure the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is posi-
tioned so it will not be stepped on, tripped over, or
otherwise subjected to damage or stress.
•
There are no user serviceable parts inside.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if it
is visibly damaged. Contact an authorized dealer-
ship for service.
•
Do not place fingers, or any other objects inside the
charge connector.
•
Do not allow children to operate the Portable Charg-
ing Cordset (EVSE). Adult supervision is mandatory
when children are in proximity when the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) is in use.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
with an extension cord or plug adapters.
•
Do not unplug the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
from the wall outlet during a charging operation.
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
During normal operation, the charge connector or AC
plug may feel warm. If either one feels hot during charg-
ing, unplug the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) and
have a qualified electrician inspect the wall outlet
before you continue charging
page 282.
WARNING!
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK: Do not use the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) with an outlet that is worn or dam-
aged. Failure to follow this warning can result in elec-
trical shock, fire, property damage, and death or seri-
ous injury.
AC LEVEL 2 CHARGING (240 VOLT,
40 AMP)
AC Level 2 (240 Volt) charging requires a 240 Volt,
Level 2 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE) charg-
ing station. A 40 Amp Level 2 EVSE for home installa-
tion is recommended. The Level 2 EVSE connects to a
40 Amp circuit breaker and delivers 32 Amp maximum
to the vehicle.
When using public charging stations, ensure the charg-
ing station is ready to provide charge and the vehicle is
in PARK before the Level 2 EVSE is plugged into the
vehicle’s charge inlet. You will hear a “click” when the
charge connector is inserted correctly and is coupled
with the vehicle’s charge inlet.
NOTE:
The vehicle should start charging automatically. If not,
please check the following:
•
Charging Station — Check the indications and
instructions at the charging station.
•
Charging Schedule — Check whether the charging
schedule is enabled and if so, whether the vehicle is
currently within the scheduled charge time/day
(weekday/weekend). If the charging schedule is
enabled within the vehicle, you may override it for
this charging event by plugging in the charge con-
nector, unplugging it, and then plugging it back into
the vehicle charge inlet. Complete the double plug
sequence within 10 seconds for it to override the set
schedule.
•
Hood Ajar — Check whether the hood is open. Charg-
ing is disabled while the hood is open, and will
resume when the hood closes.
To stop the charging process:
•
Press the button located on the Level 2 EVSE
vehicle connector.
•
Remove the connector from the vehicle charge inlet.
•
Plug the charge handle into the Level 2 EVSE station
and coil the charging cord onto its holder. Do not
leave the charging cord lying on the ground.
CHARGING TIMES
The following factors determine the time it takes to
charge the high voltage battery:
•
The high voltage battery’s current State Of Charge
(SOC)
•
The type of Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment
(EVSE) used (Level1–120VorLevel2–240V)
•
Ambient temperature
•
Whether the vehicle’s ignition is in the RUN position
during charging
NOTE:
•
The following charging times are estimates based
on charging a high voltage battery that has a <1%
State Of Charge (SOC) value displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
Charging Inlet Warning Label
1 — Dangerous Situation
2 — Risk Of Electric Shock
3 — Reference Owner’s Information
4 — Charging Timer Set
5 — Charging Procedure In Progress
6 — Charging Procedure Complete
7 — Fault In Charging Procedure
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
•
Charging times will vary based on the age, condi-
tion, SOC, available current being provided to the
charger from its energy source, and temperature of
the high voltage battery.
•
Charging times may be longer if a thermal self-
protection reduces the charging current from the
EVSE being used.
•
If the vehicle’s ignition is in the ON/RUN position,
the vehicle charge indicator may not indicate greater
than a 99% SOC and will continue to charge the
vehicle, due to the vehicle loads.
Type of EVSE Estimated Charge Time
Level 1 (120 V/12 A)
Approximately
12-13 hours
Level 2 (240 V/32 A) Approximately 2-3 hours
VEHICLE CHARGE INDICATORS
Instrument Panel High Voltage Battery Display
There is a battery display indicator located in the rear
left side of the vehicle and gives immediate feedback
on the charging status. The battery display will indicate
the current State Of Charge (SOC) for the high voltage
battery. When plugged in, the battery symbol also indi-
cates the battery level along with messages about the
charge or whether the system is waiting to charge due
to the charge schedule. These will appear unless there
is a charging fault. A green plug telltale will be shown in
the cluster, as well as applicable messaging when
charging.
State Of Charge Indicator
In addition to the battery display in the instrument clus-
ter, your vehicle is equipped with a visual SOC indicator.
The SOC indicator is made up of five lights, which will
illuminate when the vehicle is plugged into the charging
system.
The SOC indicator provides a visual indication of the
high voltage battery’s charge status during charging. It
is also used to indicate a charging problem as well as
waiting for a scheduled charge to begin.
NOTE:
The lights scroll one at a time when the vehicle is
plugged in outside of its charging schedule time/day of
the week, and it is waiting on the schedule to begin
charging.
In extreme hot or cold environments, the lights on the
SOC indicator may not illuminate. Charge status is avail-
able in the instrument cluster display. In the event of an
error in the charging process, the outer two lights will
blink.
When the hood is open, the lights on the SOC indicator
will not be illuminated.
High Voltage Battery Display
State Of Charge Indicator
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Number Of Indicator Lights Illuminated Percent Of Battery Charge
1st light blinks 0 – 20%
1st light on, 2nd light blinks 21 – 40%
1st and 2nd lights on, 3rd light blinks 41 – 60%
1st, 2nd, and 3rd lights on, 4th light blinks 61 – 80%
1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th lights on, 5th light blinks 81 – 99%
All five lights on 100%
Two outer lights are blinking Indicates an error in the charging process
Lights turn on one at a time Indicates system is waiting for scheduled time in charge schedule to begin charging
All lights turn on, then immediately turn off Indicates a successful plug-in
NOTE:
For each segment of lights illuminated indicating the
percent of battery charge, two different blink rates are
used. A blink rate of 1 second on/1 second off indi-
cates that the first half is charging. The blink rate will
increase to 0.5 second on/0.5 second off to indicate
that the second half is charging. When the battery is
fully charged, the blinking stops and the lights remain
illuminated as charging continues.
Smart Charging Port
1 — White LED Charging Mode Icons
2 — Charging Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
White LED Charging Mode Icons
Charge now
Charge by scheduled charge (if set)
Charging Button: has different uses and sequences
depending on which charging mode is set:
•
No scheduled charge
○ Plug the vehicle: charge starts
○ Push the charging button: charge is stopped
○ Push again the charging button: charge starts
again
•
Scheduled charge (not started yet)
○ Plug the vehicle, scheduled charge is ready (as
set)
○ Push the charging button: charge starts
○ Push again the charging button: charge is
stopped, and scheduled charge is set again
•
Scheduled charge (set and started)
○ Plug the charging button: charge is stopped
○ Push the charging button: immediate charge
starts (scheduled charge is overridden)
○ To restart the scheduled charge: unplug and
plug-in again the inlet
Next to the charging inlet, there is an LED that changes
color based on charging status.
LED Charging Inlet
LED Light Color Status
Blue Indicates that the system is wait-
ing for a scheduled recharge.
Flashing Green Charging process in place.
Solid Green Indicates the vehicle is fully
charged.
Blinking Red Indicates a fault in the charging
system.
Charging Inlet LED Location
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HYBRID ELECTRIC PAGES
Within your Uconnect system is the Hybrid Electric App
that allows you to see your vehicle’s power flow, under-
stand your driving history, and set a charging schedule
for your vehicle’s high voltage battery. To access this
app, press the Apps button on the main menu bar of
the radio’s touchscreen, and locate the Hybrid Electric
App. Pressing the app icon brings you to a set of hybrid
electric pages: Power Flow, Driving History, Charging
Schedule, e-Save, and Charge Settings (if equipped).
Power Flow
The Power Flow screen shows the current power read-
ings for all of the following:
•
Engine - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the
engine is generating. Based on vehicle operating
conditions, this power is used to: propel the vehicle,
provide passenger compartment heating, power
vehicle electrical loads, and charge the high voltage
battery. Engine operation is controlled to maximize
fuel economy.
•
Battery - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the
high voltage battery is currently providing/
absorbing. A negative kW indicates the vehicle’s
high voltage battery is charging.
•
Climate - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the
Climate Control system is using to maintain the cur-
rent interior temperature.
Power Flow paths are indicated by the direction of the
arrows on the touchscreen.
Driving History
The Driving History screen shows the miles (km) driven
in both Full Electric and Hybrid (battery and engine pow-
ered) modes for both the previous week and the current
week. The data is displayed in a bar graph: Electric
mode in teal and Hybrid mode in blue.
On the bar graph, miles (km) driven on the same day in
Electric mode (battery only) are always shown below
miles (km) driven in Hybrid mode. When one day of the
week exceeds 100 miles (160 km) driven, the values
for miles (km) driven in Electric and Hybrid modes will
be listed above the bar graph in respective colors (teal
for Electric and blue for Hybrid).
The regeneration graphs show the amount of energy
through coasting and braking for the current and previ-
ous week.
Charging Schedule
To set a charging schedule, select the Hybrid Electric
App on the touchscreen and follow these steps:
1. If the charging cable is connected to the vehicle,
select “Activate PHEV”, then select “Schedules”.
2. Select one of the two charging schedules by press-
ing the appropriate arrow on the right side of the
screen.
3. Select if Scheduled Charging should “Charge Until
Full”.
4. Set the Charge Start & Stop Times: Hours &
Minutes.
Apps Menu Screen
Power Flow Screen
Driving History Screen
Charging Schedules Screen
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
NOTE:
Access the “Repeat Every” feature to select the
day(s) on which to start charging.
5. When done, press the back arrow. The active sched-
ule will be indicated by the check mark to the right
of the schedule event line. The Event Action and
Time will be displayed.
6. To add another Scheduled Charging event, repeat
these steps.
NOTE:
A maximum of two independent Scheduled Charging
events can be scheduled at a given time.
Charge Until Full
If “Charge Until Full” is selected, the vehicle must be
plugged in within five minutes of the start time. The
following are situations in which “Charge Until Full” may
not be honored:
•
If selected for five days (Monday through Friday),
and the vehicle is plugged in five or more minutes
after the start time on any of those days, “Charge
Until Full” will not be honored for that day. “Charge
Until Full” will resume on the next day at the sched-
uled time.
•
If there are multiple plug/unplug events after first
being plugged in within five minutes, “Charge Until
Full” will not be honored for that day.
•
If other schedules (Charge Interval, etc.) are set at a
later time in addition to “Charge Until Full” being
selected, and the vehicle is plugged in five or more
minutes after the scheduled start time, “Charge
Until Full” will not be honored for that day. The next
available schedule will be followed.
NOTE:
•
If the charging schedule is not enabled, the vehicle
will charge whenever plugged in. It is not necessary
to set up the charging schedule to charge the
vehicle.
•
If the vehicle is plugged in outside of the charging
schedule set in the Uconnect system (and Charge
Until Full is not selected), the vehicle’s battery will
not charge. Charging will only begin immediately if
the vehicle is plugged in within the time and day of
the week set in the schedule. Otherwise, charging
will automatically begin when the selected charge
time/day of the week occurs or whenever the
vehicle is plugged in with no charge schedule set.
•
Scheduled Charging may be bypassed and charging
will begin automatically if the high voltage battery
state of charge is below its optimal operating point.
•
If the vehicle is turned off outside of the charging
window, a radio pop-up message will be displayed,
which provides an option to begin charging the
vehicle immediately. The pop-up message asks the
driver if they would like to “Charge Now?” and pro-
vides other information, including the next charging
schedule start time and estimated time to charge
the battery to 100%. If within one hour of selecting
“Yes,” the vehicle is connected to a powered EVSE,
the vehicle will immediately begin to charge (tempo-
rarily ignoring any set charge schedule). To fully
deactivate the charge schedule, refer to the “Sched-
ules” feature within the Hybrid Electric app.
•
The charging schedule can also be overridden if an
EVSE is plugged in, unplugged, and then plugged in
a second time to the vehicle. After the first plug in of
the vehicle, wait until the battery charge indicator
on the instrument panel lights up before unplugging.
This “double plug sequence” will override the sched-
ule that is set in the radio, and begin charging the
vehicle immediately. The double plug sequence
must be completed within 10 seconds for it to over-
ride the programmed schedule.
•
If “Charge Until Full” is selected, and the vehicle is
plugged in after the start time of the schedule, the
vehicle will start charging when it reaches the start
time the next day. If you would like to begin charging
immediately, and continue charging until the vehicle
is fully charged, you can select the “Charge Now”
option or use the double plug override option.
Set Charge Schedule
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SCHEDULE BYPASS
NOTE:
If the vehicle is turned off outside of the charging win-
dow, a radio pop-up message will be displayed. The
pop-up message asks the driver if they would like to
“Charge Now?” and provides the next charging sched-
ule start time and estimated time to charge the battery
to 100%. If within one hour of selecting “Yes”, the
vehicle is connected to a powered EVSE, the vehicle will
immediately begin to charge (temporarily ignoring any
set charge schedule). To fully deactivate the charge
schedule, select the “Enable Schedule” checkbox until
the check mark is removed from the box.
The charging schedule can also be overridden if the
EVSE is plugged in, unplugged, and then plugged in a
second time to the vehicle. This double plug sequence
will override the set schedule in the Hybrid Electric App,
and begin charging the vehicle immediately. The double
plug sequence must be completed within 10 seconds
for it to override the programmed schedule.
e-Save
The fourth screen within the Hybrid Electric App is the
e-Save screen. From this screen, you can specify the
behavior of the e-Save drive mode:
•
Battery Save - Maintains the high voltage State of
Charge (SOC) at its current level under most driving
scenarios.
NOTE:
The SOC may increase if there is sufficient energy
capture through regenerative braking.
•
Battery Charge - Uses additional power from the gas
engine to increase the high voltage SOC, up to 40%,
60%, or 80% capacity. If the vehicle SOC is greater
than the Battery Charge Target Charge Level, the
vehicle will use the gas and battery to efficiently
deplete down to the target level while the vehicle is
driven.
Charge Settings — If Equipped
The fifth screen within the Hybrid Electric App is the
Charge Setting screen. From this screen, you can select
the rate at which your vehicle charges. Rate selections
1 (low rate of charge) through 5 (high rate of charge)
are available. The lower the selected rate, the longer it
will take for your vehicle to reach a full charge.
The Charge Setting can be adjusted by pressing the “+”
or “-” buttons, and the estimated time until full charge
will update on the right side of the screen to reflect the
selected Charge Setting. The display also shows infor-
mation related to:
•
Battery Level — Indicates, in percentage, the high-
voltage battery SOC.
•
Estimate time to 100% — Corresponds to the time
required to obtain full recharging of the high-voltage
battery.
NOTE:
•
The Charge Setting will be saved each time the
vehicle is turned off, then back on again.
•
For information on jump starting your vehicle
page 222.
KEYS
KEY FOBS
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), Remote Start (if equipped),
and Panic button operation. The key fob allows you to
lock or unlock the doors and liftgate from distances up
to approximately 66 ft (20 m). In some conditions, this
distance can be reduced or increased. The key fob does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system. The key fob also contains an emergency key,
which is stored in the rear of the key fob.
e-Save Screen
Charge Setting Screen
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
NOTE:
•
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the
key fob is located next to a metallic object, mobile
phone, laptop, wireless charging pad, or other elec-
tronic device. This may result in poor performance.
•
If the key fob’s battery is near depletion, the key fob
performance can be reduced.
•
With the ignition on and the vehicle moving at
2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are disabled.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully
depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified
by referring to the instrument cluster, which will display
directions to follow
page 282.
To Unlock/Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once
to unlock the driver’s door. If selected within Uconnect
Settings, pushing the unlock button twice within five
seconds will unlock all the doors and the liftgate. To
lock all the doors and the liftgate, push the lock button
once. Unlock settings can be changed within the
Uconnect system
page 149.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash
and the illuminated entry system will be activated.
When the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash
and the horn will chirp.
Using The Panic Feature
To turn the Panic feature on or off, push the Panic but-
ton on the key fob. When the Panic feature is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn may pulse on and
off (if equipped with horn alarm), and the interior lights
will turn on.
The Panic feature will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a sec-
ond time or driving the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
•
The interior lights will turn off if you place the igni-
tion in the ON/RUN position while the Panic feature
is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn
(if equipped with horn alarm) will remain on.
•
You may need to be closer than 66 ft (20 m) from
the vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the
Panic feature due to the radio frequency noises
emitted by the system.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
and an interior chime will sound. An exterior audible
and visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along
with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
•
The doors have to be open and then closed in order
for the vehicle to detect a key fob. The Key Left
Vehicle feature will activate when the first door is
closed and no key fob is detected in the vehicle. If
the warning has been activated, and the other doors
are closed, no other warnings will be issued.
•
These alerts will not be activated in situations where
either the vehicle’s engine is left running with the
key fob inside, or the key fob’s wireless signals are
blocked.
Keyless Ignition Key Fob
1 — Unlock
2 — Liftgate
3—Panic
4 — Lock
5 — Remote Start (If Equipped)
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Using The Key Fob To Open/Close
Vehicle Windows — If Equipped
To Open The Windows
From outside of the vehicle, push the unlock button on
the key fob twice, and hold for several seconds. All
vehicle door windows will open.
To Close The Windows
From outside of the vehicle, push the lock button on the
key fob twice, and hold for several seconds. All vehicle
door windows will close.
NOTE:
•
This feature is enabled through Uconnect Settings
page 149.
•
Vehicle must be equipped with front and rear auto
up/down windows.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
•
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin
battery dimensions.
•
Perchlorate material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
•
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the
back housing or the printed circuit board.
To replace the key fob battery, proceed as follows:
1. Place the key fob with the buttons facing downward,
then press on both sides of the key fob at the same
time while sliding the cover downward to remove.
2. Remove the emergency key by lifting it out of its
housing.
3. Remove the battery cap by rotating it
counterclockwise.
4. Remove the key fob battery from its housing and
replace it with the same type.
Remove Key Fob Cover
Remove Emergency Key
Remove Battery Cap
Key Fob Battery Replacement
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
WARNING!
•
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
•
If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
•
Keep new and used batteries away from children.
If the battery compartment does not close
securely, stop using the product and keep it away
from children.
Programming And Requesting
Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
•
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be repurposed and reprogrammed to another
vehicle.
•
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position when exiting the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
•
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
•
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
match the vehicle locks.
•
It is not mandatory to replace the key fob if a new
emergency key is needed, and vice versa.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The sys-
tem does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is
locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unau-
thorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that
are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a
key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb
check, it indicates that there is a problem with the elec-
tronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone attempted to
start the engine with an invalid key fob. In the event
that a valid key fob is used to start the engine but there
is an issue with the vehicle electronics, the engine will
start and shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the elec-
tronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as
soon as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
page 282.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also consid-
ered an invalid key.
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has three operating
modes. The three modes are: OFF, ON/RUN, and START.
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
•
The engine is stopped.
•
Some electrical devices (e.g., power locks, etc.) are
still available.
ON/RUN
•
Driving mode.
•
All electrical devices are available (e.g., climate con-
trols, heated seats, etc.).
START
•
The engine will start.
Starting The Engine With A Depleted Key Fob Battery
If the ignition state/mode does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a backup method can
be used to operate the ignition switch:
Place the key fob in the cupholder, and then press the
ignition button.
NOTE:
If the key fob battery is depleted, and the vehicle doors
were locked using the key fob lock button, Passive Entry
lock button (if equipped), or the vehicle App
(if equipped), the engine must be started using the
described backup starting method. The vehicle doors
can then be unlocked using one of the unlock methods
(key fob, Passive Entry handle, or vehicle App).
To Stop The Engine With A Depleted Key Fob Battery
Push and hold the ignition button for several seconds,
or push it three times quickly.
NOTE:
•
The ignition button will not activate if the key fob is
inside the rear cargo compartment while the liftgate
is open.
•
If the ignition is in the ON/RUN position for 30 min-
utes while the gear selector is in PARK, the ignition
will automatically be placed in the OFF position.
•
For information on normal starting, see
page 98.
•
When opening the driver's door and the ignition is in
the ON/RUN (engine not running) position, a chime
will sound to remind you to place the ignition in the
OFF position. In addition to the chime, the “Vehicle
On” message will display in the cluster.
Disabling A Key Fob Left Inside The Vehicle
The key fob can be disabled from starting the vehicle if
it is left in the passenger compartment. To do this, pro-
ceed as follows:
1. Close all doors and the liftgate.
2. Push the lock button on another key fob twice, or
push the Passive Entry lock button on the door
handle (with another key fob within range), waiting
three seconds between each push.
3. Wait 30 seconds without unlocking the vehicle or
opening any doors.
START/STOP Ignition Button
Place Key Fob In Cupholder
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
To reactivate the previously disabled key fob, the
vehicles must be either unlocked or started with a key
fob.
WARNING!
•
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-
less Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
— PHEV ONLY
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
NOTE:
This vehicle is equipped with an automatic shutdown
feature. If the vehicle is left with the ignition in the RUN
position (engine not running) with gear selector in PARK
for 30 minutes, it will automatically turn off the vehicle.
If the driver door is opened, then closed while propul-
sion is active and the vehicle is in PARK, the vehicle will
shut down. Notifications have been designed into this
feature to raise awareness of the timed event by show-
ing messages in the instrument cluster display.
The instrument cluster display will also show the mes-
sage “Ready to Drive” accompanied with three audible
chimes while the driver door is opened while the igni-
tion state is in READY mode. The interior warnings will
occur regardless of whether the key fob remains in the
vehicle or is removed. The horn will sound three times,
and the turn signals will flash, if the key fob is removed
from the vehicle while the ignition state is in READY
mode.
To restart the vehicle, follow the normal process for
starting your vehicle.
The START/STOP ignition button has three operating
modes. The three modes are: OFF, ON/RUN, and START.
NOTE:
•
Pushing the START/STOP ignition button may only
activate the Electric Propulsion System and not start
the vehicle’s engine (if running the engine is not
currently required by the Hybrid system). READY will
show in the instrument cluster display whenever the
vehicle is operating in Electric mode and the vehicle
is stationary.
•
If the vehicle’s ignition is in either ACC or RUN, the
vehicle charge indicator may not display a value
greater than 99% state of charge due to vehicle
loads.
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
•
The engine is stopped.
•
Some electrical devices (e.g., power locks, etc.) are
still available.
•
Mechanical power (Vehicle Propulsion) is not
available
START/STOP Ignition Button
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ON/RUN
•
Driving mode.
•
All electrical devices are available (e.g., climate con-
trols, heated seats, etc.).
•
As long as READY appears in the instrument cluster
display, it does not matter if the engine is running or
not, vehicle propulsion is available
START
•
The engine will start.
NOTE:
•
Vehicle propulsion is only available after the vehicle
has passed through the START position.
•
If the brake is pressed and the ignition is placed in
the RUN position with a charging cable connected to
the vehicle, the instrument cluster display will not
display the READY state. When the charging cable is
unplugged from the vehicle, the vehicle will go into
the READY state. If the vehicle is not shifted out of
PARK 30 minutes after being unplugged, the vehicle
will disable the READY state. After an additional
30 minutes with no change in ignition status, the
ignition will turn off and the vehicle will power down
page 98.
Conditions Which May Cause The Engine To Run
•
When the Hybrid Battery State of Charge (SOC) has
reached <1%
•
When applying maximum vehicle acceleration
•
While maintaining the Exhaust System Catalyst Tem-
perature in Hybrid or e-Save modes
•
When the hood is open with the ignition in RUN,
post-START mode
•
When Manual Mode/Tip Mode is in use
•
When the engine is temporarily operating in Fuel
and Oil Refresh Mode (e.g. if the system detects a
stale fuel or aged oil condition after a long period
without combustion engine operation)
•
When the vehicle is started in very cold ambient
temperatures
•
When the vehicle is in a lower ambient temperature
and may need to support passenger compartment
heating
For information on starting the engine with a depleted
key fob battery, see
page 35.
WARNING!
•
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-
less Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
while still maintaining security. The system
has a range of approximately 328 ft
(100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambi-
ent conditions before the customer enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
•
For PHEV Models: Remote Start while the vehicle is
plugged in may not always start the engine.
•
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range
page 282.
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will
lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp
twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a
15 minute cycle. Pushing the Remote Start button a
third time shuts the engine off.
NOTE:
•
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
•
Remote Start can only be used twice.
•
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
•
The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
For security, power window and power sunroof
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
•
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated
for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Gear selector in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Liftgate closed
•
Hazard switch off
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level
•
Key Fob Panic button not pushed
•
System not disabled from previous Remote Start
event
•
Ignition in the OFF position
•
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
•
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated
•
For PHEV Models: Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
is not illuminated while the vehicle’s propulsion sys-
tem is active
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start sys-
tem, push and release the START/STOP ignition button
prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again, or
if the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute
cycle. Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the climate controls will resume previously set
operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).
For PHEV Models: The ignition can be placed in the
RUN (Propulsion System Available) position by pushing
the ignition button with the key fob inside the vehicle,
and then pushing the ignition button one more time to
place the ignition in the OFF position.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the ignition switch
must be in the ON/RUN position in order to drive the
vehicle.
•
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
— Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will show in the instru-
ment cluster display until you push the START/STOP
ignition button.
•
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or
less. The timing is dependent on the ambient tempera-
ture. Once the timer expires, the system will automati-
cally adjust the settings depending on ambient condi-
tions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped” in the next section for detailed operation.
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START COMFORT
SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather. The
heated steering wheel and driver heated seat feature
will turn on if programmed in the Comfort menu screen
within Uconnect Settings
page 149. In warm
weather, the driver vented seat feature will automati-
cally turn on when Remote Start is activated, if pro-
grammed in the Comfort menu screen. The vehicle will
adjust the climate control settings depending on the
outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls will automatically adjust to the
optimal temperature and mode settings depending on
the outside ambient temperature. This will occur until
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the
climate controls will resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
•
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the climate settings will default to maximum heat,
with fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost
timer expires, the vehicle will enter Mix mode.
•
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based on
the last settings selected by the driver.
•
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or above,
the climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level
mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see
page 62.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will
change, and exit the automatic defaults, if manually
adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in Remote
Start mode. This includes turning the climate controls
off using the OFF button.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD
WIPER DE-ICER ACTIVATION —
IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue.
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE —
IF EQUIPPED
One of the following messages will display in the instru-
ment cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start
or exits Remote Start prematurely:
•
Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
•
Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
•
Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
•
Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Open
•
Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
•
Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
•
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position.
SCHEDULED CABIN CONDITIONING
(SCC) — IF EQUIPPED (PHEV ONLY)
This feature allows the driver to pre-condition (warm up
or cool down) the passenger cabin based on a planned
departure time. The target temperature is preset to the
same values used by the Remote Start feature. Unlike
Remote Start, the driver does not need to initiate the
cabin conditioning by pushing the Remote Start button,
instead, a programmed departure time will be used.
Also, all scheduled cabin conditioning will be powered
by the vehicle’s high voltage battery working in conjunc-
tion with any Electrical Vehicle Supply Equipment
(EVSE) connected to the vehicle. Unlike Remote Start,
in SCC the vehicle’s gas engine will not start to provide
power or heat for cabin conditioning.
The SCC event times are used to wake up the vehicle so
that the Climate Control system can condition the pas-
senger cabin prior to the scheduled departure time.
Based on vehicle operating conditions, ambient tem-
perature, and the next programmed departure time, the
vehicle will determine when to begin cabin conditioning.
NOTE:
If the ambient temperature is less than 40 ° F (4.5 °C),
the vehicle’s front and rear defrosters and heated mir-
rors will also be activated during an Scheduled Cabin
Conditioning event.
The SCC will continue for a maximum of 15 minutes
after the scheduled departure time. The SCC feature
can be activated a second time after the first 15 min-
utes of conditioning have expired. After this second acti-
vation, the vehicle’s ignition must be placed in the
ON/RUN position to allow future activations.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
All of the following conditions must be met before the
vehicle will initiate a scheduled SCC event:
•
Gear selector in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Liftgate closed
•
Hazard switch off
•
12 Volt battery at an acceptable charge level
•
Key fob not located inside the vehicle
•
Ignition in the OFF position
•
Remote Start has not been activated
•
SCC has not been activated twice in a row
•
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
Scheduling An SCC Event:
1. Select the Hybrid Electric App on the touchscreen.
2. Select “Schedules”.
3. Select the schedule to be set (1,2, or 3) by pressing
the appropriate arrow on the right side of the
touchscreen.
4. Choose “Climate Schedule”.
5. Select if SCC should stop when the high voltage bat-
tery drops to 25% or lower.
6.
Set the Departure Time: Hours, Minutes, and AM/PM.
7. Select the days that this SCC event will occur. The
“Repeat” indicator illuminates to indicate that SCC
will occur every week on the selected day(s), at the
selected time.
If you uncheck the “Repeat” option, all the days of
the week will be grayed out and the vehicle will per-
form only one SCC event, which will occur at the
next available time that matches the SCC event time
(regardless of what day it was originally set to occur
before “Repeat” was unchecked).
8. To schedule another SCC event, press the X and
repeat these steps.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The front doors can be manually unlocked by pulling
the inside door handle. The driver’s door can also be
manually locked/unlocked by inserting the emergency
key into the lock cylinder on the outside door handle.
The rear doors can be manually unlocked with a double
pull of the inside door handle.
All doors except the driver’s door can be manually
locked by inserting the emergency key into the emer-
gency lock and rotating the key. The emergency lock
lever is located on the door latch face of each door.
Schedules Screen
Select Climate Schedule
Set Climate Schedule
Driver’s Door Cylinder Lock
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the Vehicle
Security system.
•
The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the
liftgate.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and exit the vehicle.
•
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
If equipped with a Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition,
always make sure the keyless ignition is in the OFF
position, remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock the vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause severe personal injuries or
death.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. Do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on each front
door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors
and liftgate.
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position, and any door or the liftgate
is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents
you from accidentally locking the key fob in the vehicle.
Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the
doors and liftgate will allow the locks to operate.
NOTE:
There are lights in the driver and passenger locks that
indicate when the doors are locked. If you attempt to
lock the doors when a door is opened, the light on the
drivers door will flash.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ —
PASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry. This feature
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) with-
out having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
•
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through
Uconnect Settings
page 149.
•
The key fob may not detect the Passive Entry system
if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the Passive
Entry system from locking and unlocking the vehicle.
•
If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing, or
there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry door
handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
Emergency Lock
Power Door Lock Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
•
The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the
Passive Entry door handles, if the key fob is located
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
handle.
•
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
relock and, will arm the Vehicle Security system
(if equipped).
To Unlock From The Driver's Side Or Passenger’s Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
either front door handle, grab the door handle to unlock
the door automatically.
•
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system
page 149.
•
All doors and the liftgate will unlock when the front
passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive
Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
•
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key
fob while a door is open.
•
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
•
A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a Passive Entry key fob inside the vehicle and it
does not detect any Passive Entry key fobs outside the
vehicle, then the vehicle will unlock and alert the
customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Pas-
sive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The
vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the follow-
ing conditions are true:
•
The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
•
Three attempts are made to lock the doors using
the door panel switch and then the doors are
closed.
•
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within
5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handle, push the Pas-
sive Entry lock button located on the outside door
handle to lock the vehicle doors and liftgate.
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the
doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked
by pulling the door handle without the vehicle
unlocking.
•
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect set-
tings, the key fob protection described in "Frequency
Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)"
remains active/functional.
•
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key
fob battery is depleted.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs close to
the liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release button
to open the liftgate.
NOTE:
•
If the key fob is inadvertently forgotten inside of the
cargo area, and an attempt is made to close it from
outside, the liftgate will not lock. With the doors
locked, the liftgate unlocked, and the key fob
detected inside the vehicle, the liftgate will unlock
again and the lights flash twice.
•
Before driving, make sure the liftgate is closed
correctly.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock button located
on the outside liftgate door handle.
NOTE:
•
The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock all
doors and the liftgate
page 282.
•
For additional information on how to use your lift-
gate, refer to
page 74.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
IF EQUIPPED
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle's speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
The auto door lock feature is enabled or disabled within
the Uconnect system
page 149.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON
EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
enabled.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is placed in
PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
DEAD LOCK DEVICE — IF EQUIPPED
The Dead Lock Device is a safety device that prevents
the use of the internal door handles of the vehicle and
the power door lock switch. This device prevents the
doors from opening within the passenger compartment.
The device works on all doors.
Arming The Device
•
The device is armed after two pushes of the lock
button on the key fob
•
For vehicles equipped with Passive Entry, the device
will also work by pushing the lock button on the driv-
er’s or passenger’s side exterior door handle
The arming of the device is indicated by three flashes of
the turn signals.
NOTE:
The device does not operate if one or more doors are
not properly closed.
Disarming The Device
•
The device will automatically disarm by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob
•
By placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position
•
For vehicles equipped with Passive Entry, the device
will also disarm by using the driver’s or passenger’s
Passive Entry door handle to unlock and open the
door
Electronic Liftgate Handle
1 — Passive Entry Button
2 — Electronic Liftgate Release Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
SYSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat-
blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the
dial to the lock or unlock position. When the system on
a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by
using the outside door handle even if the inside door
lock is in the unlocked position.
NOTE:
•
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door
lock is in the unlocked position.
•
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the desired position.
•
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys-
tem, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
•
For emergency exit with the system engaged, rotate
the door lock button until the lock indicator is hid-
den (unlocked position), lower the window, and open
the door with the outside door handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. After
engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for
effective engagement by trying to open a door with the
internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock
system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors
from inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the
vehicle, be sure to check that there is no one left
inside.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever
is located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,
pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired. To lock the steering column in position, push
the control handle upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating ele-
ment that helps warm your hands in cold
weather. Once the heated steering wheel
has been turned on, it will stay on until the
operator turns it off. The heated steering wheel may not
turn on when it is already warm.
To access the heated steering wheel button,
press the Comfort settings button within the
Uconnect system.
•
Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heat on.
•
Press the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the heat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 39.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabe-
tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exer-
cise care when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, espe-
cially if used for long periods.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steer-
ing wheel covers of any type or material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to three differ-
ent memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile saves desired position set-
tings for the following features:
•
Driver seat position
•
A set of desired radio station presets
The memory setting switch is located on the driver’s
door trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons
(1), (2) and (3) which are used to recall either of the
three saved memory profiles and to activate the
memory save functions.
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY
FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE:
Vehicle must be stationary. Saving a new memory pro-
file will erase an existing profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON position.
2. Adjust the seat to the desired position.
3. Push the desired memory profile button (1, 2, or 3)
for 1.5 seconds. A beep will sound to confirm the
memory profile has been successfully stored.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
To recall the memory settings for driver, push briefly the
desired memory button number (1, 2 or 3).
NOTE:
•
Recalling a memory setting profile can also be done
about 20 minutes after the doors are opened and
about 20 minutes after the engine is stopped.
•
The movement of the seat is suspended if the
engine is started following the recall.
Memory Switches
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT REAR SEATS
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With
Fold-Flat Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can
be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and
still maintains some rear seating room.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also, be
sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned
forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
TO LOWER THE REAR SEAT
1. Pull the seatback release lever located on either
side of the upper outer edge of the seat.
2.
Fold that side of the rear seatback completely forward.
TO RAISE THE REAR SEAT
NOTE:
If interference from the cargo area prevents the seat-
back from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning
the seat to its proper position.
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
The release lever will show a red indicator while in the
unlocked position. Once the seat is locked in, the red
indicator will no longer be visible.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
POWER ADJUSTMENT FRONT
SEATS
Some models may be equipped with a power driver's
seat and/or power passenger seat. The power seat
switch and power seat recliner switch are located on
the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use the
power seat switch to adjust seat height, angle, or
forward/rearward position. Use the power seat recline
switch to adjust the angle of the seatback.
Rear Seat Release Levers
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Height Adjustment
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilt Adjustment
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of the
seat switch and the front of the seat cushion will move
in the direction of the switch.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or
Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rear-
ward. Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward.
The seatback will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lum-
bar support. Pushing upward or downward on the
switch will raise and lower the position of the support.
FRONT HEATED SEATS —
IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabe-
tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical condition must exer-
cise care when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time.
•
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cush-
ion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could
cause serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Recline Switch
Power Lumbar Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
The front heated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control buttons through
the climate or controls screen.
•
Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
•
Press the heated seat button a second time to turn
the MED setting on.
•
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
LO setting on.
•
Press the heated seat button a fourth time to turn
the heating elements off.
If the HI level setting is selected, the system will auto-
matically switch to a lower level after approximately
15 minutes (depending on environmental conditions) of
continuous operation. The heated seat feature will then
turn off automatically approximately 45 minutes after
switching to a lower level.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 39.
FRONT VENTILATED SEATS —
IF EQUIPPED
Located in the seat cushion and seat back
are fans that draw the air from the passen-
ger compartment and move air through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help keep
the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at three speeds: HI,
MED, and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the con-
trols screen.
•
Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
•
Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
choose MED.
•
Press the ventilated seat button a third time to
choose LO.
•
Press the ventilated seat button a fourth time to
turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 39.
REAR SEAT ARMREST —
IF EQUIPPED
The center part of the rear seat can also be used as a
rear armrest with cup holders, pull the rear armrest
strap to release it from the seat and pull forward.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Pull Rear Armrest Strap
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the
top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear.
WARNING!
•
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
•
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear of
the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain
additional clearance to the back of your head.
Front Head Restraint Adjustment
Your vehicle is equipped with front two-way driver and
passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint.
WARNING!
•
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
•
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment
The rear outboard head restraints can be adjusted up
or down.
To raise the outboard head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located at the base of the head
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Head Restraint Removal
To remove the front head restraints, proceed as follows:
1. Raise the head restraint to its maximum height.
2. Push the adjustment button and the release button
at the side of the two supports at the same time.
3. Pull upward on the head restraint to fully remove it.
Head Restraint Adjustment
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
Outboard Head Restraint Adjustment Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
To reinstall the head restraints, proceed as follows:
1. Hold down both the adjustment button and release
button while placing the head restraint posts into
the holes.
2. Then, reposition the head restraint to the appropri-
ate height for the passengers.
3. Replace the seatback to the appropriate position for
passengers.
NOTE:
•
The rear outboard head restraints may be removed
by inserting a pointed object such as a pen into the
release button location. Follow the preceding front
head restraints instructions for removal steps.
•
The rear center head restraint is fixed, and is not
adjustable or removable.
WARNING!
•
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow
removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
•
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the preceding reinstallation instructions prior to
operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS — IF EQUIPPED
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help-
ful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your vehicle’s Voice
Recognition (VR) system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following Voice Commands can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the Voice Recognition (VR) button. You can also
say the Wake Up word “Hey, Alfa”, ”Hey, Alfa Romeo”, or
Hey, Uconnect”. After the beep, say:
•
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
•
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
•
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate your Voice
Recognition system. You can also use the system’s
“Wake Up” word to activate voice recognition. The Wake
Up word can be set through the Uconnect Settings
page 149.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
•
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passen-
ger conversations are examples of noise that may
impact recognition.
•
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead.
•
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the
VR button or say the Wake Up word, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
•
You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a
Voice Command from the current category.
•
You can also interrupt the help message or system
prompts by speaking. This feature is called “barge-
in” and can be set through the Uconnect Settings
page 149.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — For Vehicles Equipped With Navigation: Push The
Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio, Media, Navi-
gation, Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone Call, And Send
Or Receive A Text
1 — For Vehicles Not Equipped With Navigation: Push
The Phone Button To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2023 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and
all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
page 282.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit
DriveUconnect.com (US) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Automatic Dimming Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
The rearview mirror can be adjusted left and right, or
tilted up and down. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s rear
view.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors and lift the mirror cover.
Sun Visor Slide-On-Rod Feature —
If Equipped
The sun visor Slide-On-Rod feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the
sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun blockage.
NOTE:
The sun visor can also be extended while the sun visor
is against the windshield for additional sun blockage
through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of
the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
NOTE:
The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a
much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane
next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger
side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your pas-
senger side convex mirror could cause you to collide
with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING
MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The driver’s outside mirror and if equipped, the passen-
ger’s outside mirror, will automatically dim for glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by
the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will
automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Lift Illuminated Vanity Mirror Cover
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
POWER ADJUSTMENT MIRRORS
The power mirror control switch is located on the driv-
er's side door trim panel.
To adjust a mirror, rotate the mirror selection switch to
the left or to the right, and then push the mirror adjust-
ment switch in any of the four directions.
NOTE:
•
To adjust the power mirrors, the ignition must be in
the ON/RUN position.
•
Once adjustment is complete, rotate the knob to the
neutral position to prevent accidental movements.
•
The power mirror switches will remain active for up
to three minutes after the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature.
Power Folding — If Equipped
To fold the outside mirrors in, push the power folding
mirror switch. Push the switch a second time to unfold
the mirrors to the driving position. Any push of the
power folding mirror switch will reverse the operation.
If the power mirror control switch is moved again during
door mirror folding (from closed to open position and
vice versa), the movement direction is reversed.
Automatic Power Folding — If Equipped
The outside mirrors may be equipped with an automatic
folding feature, designed to help in narrow parking situ-
ations or in tight spaces. When pulling into a narrow
space, the mirrors will fold-in automatically. The mirrors
will automatically unfold when existing the narrow
space.
NOTE:
•
If the power fold mirror button is pressed, it must be
pressed again to unfold the mirror.
•
The outside mirrors must always be in the unfolded
position when the vehicle is in motion, except when
driving through narrow locations.
FOLDING MIRRORS
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to
pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The
mirror has two detent positions: normal and full
rearward.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Selector Switch
2 — Mirror Adjustment Switch
3 — Power Folding Position (If Equipped)
Folding Mirror
Folding Mirror Positions
1 — Full Rearward Position
2 — Normal Driving Position
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
This feature will be activated whenever you
turn on the rear window defroster
(if equipped)
page 62.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
•
HomeLink® replaces up to three
hand-held transmitters that operate
devices such as garage door open-
ers, motorized gates, lighting, or
home security systems. The HomeLink® unit is pow-
ered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
•
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sun visor designate the three
different HomeLink® channels.
•
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons
will activate the devices they are programmed to
with each press of the corresponding HomeLink®
button.
•
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security sys-
tem is active
page 282.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended
that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmit-
ter of the device that is being programmed to the
HomeLink® system. Make sure your hand-held trans-
mitter is programmed to activate the device you are
trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of
your HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
CHANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons
(I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the
HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE
A ROLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING
CODE DEVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether the
device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device
with a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately visible when
looking at the device. The name and color of the button
may vary slightly by manufacturer.
HomeLink® Buttons On Sun Visor
Scan me
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN”
or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate
your garage door opener motor, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this pro-
cedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® but-
ton you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the garage door
opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indica-
tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this
happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code
final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code
final step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can usu-
ally be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door
opener motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to con-
firm that the garage door opener motor operates. If
the garage door opener motor does not operate,
repeat the final steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly, pro-
gramming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to con-
firm that the garage door opener motor operates. If
the garage door opener motor does not operate,
repeat the steps from the beginning.
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transmit-
ter. Do not program the transmitter if people or
pets are in the path of the door or gate.
•
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or con-
fined area while programming the transmitter.
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and
can cause you and others to be severely injured or
killed.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
MISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a mis-
cellaneous device follows the same procedure as pro-
gramming to a garage door opener
page 149. Be
sure to determine if the device has a rolling code, or
non-rolling code before beginning the programming
process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmit-
ter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to time-out in the same manner. The pro-
cedure may need to be performed multiple times to
successfully pair the device to your HomeLink®
buttons.
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the
new device you want to program the HomeLink® button
to has a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2
in “Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
PROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmit-
ter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
place the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure
while programming HomeLink® with the engine on
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that
the garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button
while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may
take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The
garage door may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
○
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pushed.
○
To program the two remaining HomeLink® but-
tons, repeat each step for each remaining but-
ton. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® universal transmitter is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the garage door opener hand-
held transmitter.
•
Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener
to complete the training for a rolling code.
•
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transmitter. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transmit-
ter. Do not program the transmitter if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transmitter with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener with-
out these safety features.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
turn signals, headlight beam selection and passing
lights. The multifunction lever is located on the left side
of the steering column.
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights
(if equipped), fog lights, instrument panel lights, and
interior lights.
NOTE:
For PHEV Models: The fuel door release button is
located to the left of the headlight control.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel
lights are also turned on.
The headlight switch is equipped with a momentary O
(off) detent. When the vehicle is at a standstill and the
headlight switch is held in the O (off) position, the Day-
time Running Lights (DRLs) will turn on. As soon as the
vehicle starts to move, the O (off) position is disabled
and the DRLs may turn off and low beam headlights
may automatically turn on based on exterior ambient
light levels.
From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise to the first detent for automatic headlights,
the second detent for parking lights and instrument
panel lights operation, or to the third detent for head-
lights, parking lights, and instrument panel lights
operation.
Multifunction Lever
Headlight Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Rear Fog Light Button
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)
— IF EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) (low intensity) come
on automatically whenever the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, and the headlight switch is turned to
the AUTO position, and the dusk sensor detects suffi-
cient external light.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front
fog lights are turned on.
•
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that
side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when the haz-
ard warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever towards the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams. The head-
light switch must first be turned to the AUTO or on
position.
The high beam indicator will illuminate in the instru-
ment cluster when the high beams are active.
Push the lever forward again to return to low beam
headlights.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlight system provides
increased forward lighting at night by automating high
beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the windshield. This camera detects
vehicle specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle
is out of view.
To activate the Automatic High Beam Headlights, pro-
ceed as follows:
1. Within the Uconnect system, set “Auto Dim High
Beams” to “ON”.
2. Place the headlight switch in the AUTO position.
3. Push the multifunction lever forward to activate the
high beams.
NOTE:
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and
remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS —
IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the head-
lights on or off according to ambient light
levels. To turn the system on, rotate the
headlight switch clockwise to the AUTO
position.
When the system is on, the headlight time delay feature
is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up
to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF
position. To turn the automatic system off, move the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the automatic mode.
HEADLIGHTS ON AUTOMATICALLY
WITH WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on. This feature is programmable
through the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the daytime, the
vehicle will monitor outside brightness and decide if the
instrument panel needs to be dimmed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a head-
light delay that will leave the headlights on for approxi-
mately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the igni-
tion is placed in the OFF position while the headlight
switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off.
Headlight delay can be canceled by either turning the
headlight switch on then off, or by placing the ignition in
the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The headlight delay time is programmable through
Uconnect Settings
page 149.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver's door is opened.
REAR FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the rear fog lights, turn on the parking lights
or the low beam headlights, and push the fog light but-
ton on the headlight switch.
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
are on, or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster dis-
play will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog
lights will turn off when the button is pushed a second
time, when the headlight switch is rotated to the off
position, or the high beam is selected.
CORNERING LIGHTS —
IF EQUIPPED
The cornering lights are a feature to improve visibility at
night while turning the vehicle. When activated, a light
incorporated in the headlight assembly will illuminate
on the side of the vehicle the steering wheel is rotated,
or that the turn signal indicator is on. It can be acti-
vated through the Uconnect system
page 149.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster display flash to show proper operation.
Once the turn signal lever is activated, it will return to
its original position. To cancel the turn signal action, the
lever must be moved again or the turn in that direction
must be completed.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
To turn off the flashing before the end of the cycle,
move the lever in the opposite direction until the first
click (about half way).
BATTERY SAVER FEATURE
To protect the battery, if the headlight switch is left in
the low beam or parking lights position when the igni-
tion is placed in the OFF position, the lights are deacti-
vated after eight minutes. The lights can also be turned
off manually by rotating the headlight switch to the O
(off) position.
Fog Light Button
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 15 minutes after the ignition is placed in
the OFF position, and no other activity in the vehicle
has occurred. This will occur if the interior lights were
turned on manually or are on because a door is open.
This includes the glove compartment light and the
cargo area light. To restore interior light operation,
either place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, or
push the light switch on and then back off.
Front Map Reading Lights
The front map/reading and overhead lights are
mounted in the overhead console. Each light can be
turned on by pushing the corresponding switch on the
console. These switches are backlit for nighttime visibil-
ity. To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time.
NOTE:
Before exiting the vehicle, ensure that the overhead
lights are off. This will prevent the battery from dis-
charging once the doors are closed. If a light is left on
accidentally, the overhead lights will turn off automati-
cally approximately 15 minutes after the ignition has
been placed in the OFF position.
Overhead Light Timing
On certain models, to assist getting in and out of the
vehicle at night or in poorly-lit areas, two timed modes
have been provided.
Timing While Getting Into The Vehicle
The overhead lights turn on according to the following
modes:
•
Will illuminate for approximately three minutes when
the doors are unlocked.
•
Will illuminate for approximately three minutes when
one of the doors is opened.
•
Will illuminate for approximately 27 seconds when
each individual door is closed and switch off simul-
taneously when the doors are locked.
Timing is interrupted when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
Three Modes Are Available For Turning Off Overhead
Lighting:
•
When all doors are closed after entering the vehicle,
the three-minute timer will stop and a seconds timer
will start for the interior lights. This timing will stop
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
•
When doors are locked (either with key fob or with
the emergency key inserted in driver side door), the
overhead light turns off.
•
The interior lights will turn off after 15 minutes to
preserve the battery.
Timing While Getting Out Of The Vehicle
After placing the ignition in the OFF position, the over-
head lights will turn on as follows:
•
For a few seconds after the engine stops.
•
For approximately three minutes when one of the
doors is opened.
•
For several seconds when the last door is closed.
The timing stops automatically when the doors are
locked.
Overhead Console
1 — Reading/Map Light Switch
2 — Rear Overhead Lights Switch
3 — Overhead Lights Switch
4 — Overhead Lights On/Off When Doors Open
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
Rear Overhead Light
The rear overhead lights are activated or deactivated by
on/off switches located on the front overhead console
or within the rear overhead lights themselves.
The light turns on when a door is opened.
NOTE:
The light will turn off automatically after a few minutes
if a door is left open. To turn it on again, open another
door or close and reopen the same door.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch and is located on the driver’s side of
the instrument panel.
Rotating the instrument panel dimmer up or down will
adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights if
the built-in light sensor determines that the ambient
light levels are low enough that the backlighting should
be enabled.
Interior Ambient Lighting — If Equipped
The brightness of the interior passenger compartment
lights can be adjusted through Uconnect Settings
page 149.
The lights can be adjusted to six different levels of
brightness.
Battery Saver Feature
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 15 minutes after the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position. This will occur if the interior
lights were switched on manually or are on because a
door is open.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on
the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of
the steering column. The front wipers are operated by
rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever. For
information on the rear wiper/washer, see
page 62.
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rear Overhead Light On/Off Switches
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Windshield Wiper Operation
1 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
2 — Pull For Front Washer
3 — Rotate Switch For Front Wiper Operation
4 — Push Up for Mist Feature
5 — Pull Lever Downward For Rear Wiper Operation
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Your vehicle may also be equipped with a Menu View
button at the end of your Windshield Wiper Stalk, for
more information see
page 80
Rotating the switch to the Low Continuous
Wiper Speed position activates the first (low)
level continuous speed of the windshield
wipers in manual mode.
Rotating the switch to the High Continuous
Wiper Speed position activates the second
(high) level continuous speed of the wind-
shield wipers in manual mode.
Rotating the switch to the O (off) position
turns the windshield wipers off.
Rain Sensor Sensitivity Level
Rotating the switch to the Low Sensitivity
Rain Sensing position, activates the first,
less sensitive level of the Rain Sensing
function.
Rotating the switch to the High Sensitivity
Rain Sensing position, activates the second,
more sensitive level of the Rain Sensing
function
page 61.
Windshield Washer
To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper lever
toward the steering wheel and hold.
Both the windshield washer jet and the windshield wip-
ers will be activated. The wipers and washer will con-
tinue to operate until you let go of the lever.
The windshield wipers stop working three strokes after
the stalk is released, followed by a final stroke six sec-
onds later to complete the cycle.
Mist
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
shield. The washer function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
page 238.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the parked
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the parked position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield
and automatically activates the wipers. The Rain Sen-
sor is located behind the interior rearview mirror.
The sensor has an adjustment range that varies pro-
gressively from wiper still (no stroke) when the wind-
shield is dry, to wiper at continuous speed (fast opera-
tion) with intense rain.
Activation
1. Rotate the wiper switch to the Low Sensitivity Rain
Sensing position or High Sensitivity Rain Sensing
position.
2. Tap the wiper stalk upwards.
The variation in sensitivity during rain sensor operation
is signaled by a stroke of the wiper.
If the windshield washer is used with the rain sensor
activated, the normal washing cycle is performed, and
then the rain sensor resumes its normal automatic
operation.
Rain Sensor
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
NOTE:
Keep the glass in the sensor area clean.
Deactivation
To turn off the Rain Sensing Wipers, use the wiper
switch or place the ignition in the OFF position.
In the event of malfunction of the rain sensor while it is
active, the windshield wiper operates intermittently at a
speed consistent with the sensitivity setting of the rain
sensor, whether or not there is rain on the glass for as
long as the sensor failure is indicated on the display.
The sensor continues to operate and it is possible to
set the windshield wiper to continuous mode (low or
high). The failure indication remains on for as long as
the sensor is active.
The rain sensor is able to recognize and automatically
adjust itself when the following conditions occur:
•
Presence of dirt on the controlled surface (e.g., salt,
dirt, etc.).
•
Presence of streaks of water caused by the worn
window wiper blades.
•
Difference between day and night.
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
Shifting the vehicle into REVERSE with the windshield
wiper operating activates a single cycle of the rear win-
dow wiper.
Push the windshield wiper lever downward (with the
vehicle in REVERSE) to activate/deactivate continuous
rear wiper operation.
Push the windshield wiper lever downward (without the
vehicle in REVERSE) to activate/deactivate intermittent
rear wiper operation.
Push the windshield wiper lever towards the instrument
panel to activate the rear window washer (a brief push
activates one washing cycle, while keeping the stalk
pushed washes continuously until the stalk is
released).
NOTE:
Make sure the rear wiper is turned off when cleaning
the windshield glass.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the
radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
DESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on
the touchscreen to change the current set-
ting to the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C
operation to exit. Pressing other settings will cause the
MAX A/C to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release the A/C button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the face-
plate to change the current setting. The A/C
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, dehu-
midified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin.
Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.25-Inch Display Automatic
Climate Controls
Instrument Panel Center Stack Climate Controls
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
of the radiator and through the condenser. If the prob-
lem persists, please contact an authorized dealer.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen, or push the button on the faceplate,
to change the system between automatic,
recirculation, and outside air modes. Recir-
culation can be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recir-
culation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen grayed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside
of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually
without disturbing the mode control selection. Continu-
ous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside
air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use
of this mode is not recommended.
AUTO Button
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen, or push the button on the faceplate,
to change the current setting. The AUTO indi-
cator illuminates when AUTO is on. This fea-
ture automatically controls the interior cabin tempera-
ture by adjusting distribution and amount of airflow.
Toggling this function will cause the system to switch
between manual override mode and automatic modes
page 65.
MAX Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen button,
or push and release the button on the face-
plate, to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates
when this feature is on. Performing this function will
cause the automatic climate controls to change to
manual mode, and the following settings will occur:
•
The blower speed increases to full (all LEDs on)
NOTE:
The blower speed increases to full only if warm out-
let temperature can be guaranteed. Otherwise, the
blower bars will be proportional to outlet air
temperature.
•
The air conditioning compressor is turned on (A/C
LED off)
•
Both driver and passenger temperature controls are
settoHI
•
Defrost mode is selected (LED on)
•
Rear defroster is turned on (LED on)
•
The air recirculation is turned off (LED off)
If MAX Defrost mode is turned off, the Climate Control
system will return to the previous setting. MAX Defrost
automatically turns off after a few minutes.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the touch-
screen, or push and release the button on
the faceplate, to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and
a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Driver And Passenger Temperature
Control Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push upward on the driver’s or passenger’s
side toggle switch on the faceplate, or press
and slide the temperature bar towards the
red arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings.
Push downward the driver’s or passenger’s
side toggle switch on the faceplate, or press
and slide the temperature bar towards the
blue arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen
to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator is illuminated when SYNC is on.
SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower will
cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected using either the blower
control buttons on the faceplate or the buttons on the
touchscreen.
Faceplate
Press the small blower icon button to decrease the
blower speed, or press the large blower icon button to
increase the blower speed.
Touchscreen
Blower speed can also be selected by pressing a num-
ber on the blower bar area.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
buttons on the touchscreen, or the face-
plate, to change the airflow distribution
mode. The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel out-
lets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard
outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to
regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side win-
dow demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost,
side window demister outlets, and panel
outboard outlets.
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side win-
dow demist outlets. When the defrost button
is selected, the blower level may increase.
Use Defrost mode with maximum tempera-
ture settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front
defrost mode button, the Climate Control system will
return to the previous setting.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield. A slight amount of air is
also directed through the panel outboard outlets.
Combine Modes
Dual Level Combination
Front Defrost and Panel Mode
Tri-Level Combination
Front Defrost, Panel Mode, and Floor Mode
The driver or front passenger can combine
two or three of the modes described by
selecting them individually on the climate
control screen. Combine modes by pressing
each icon on the touchscreen.
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen, or push and release the button on
the faceplate to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE
CONTROL (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen (if equipped) on the Auto-
matic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the sys-
tem to maintain by adjusting the temperature con-
trol buttons. Once the desired temperature is dis-
played, the system achieves and automatically
maintains that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it
is not necessary to change the settings. You experi-
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
•
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings
for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically
adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed
to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in US or Metric
units by selecting the US/Metric customer-
programmable feature.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan remains on
low until the engine warms up. The blower increases in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual over-
ride features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display
will be turned off when the system is being used in the
manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep every-
one comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say one of the following commands:
•
“Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
•
“Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated
seats or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for sug-
gested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheat-
ing. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is
recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is func-
tioning properly and the proper amount, type, and con-
centration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recom-
mended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control sys-
tem when the vehicle is being stored for an extended
period of time, see
page 269.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves.
Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
and if they enter the air distribution box, they could plug
the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service
your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when
needed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And Vehicle
Interior Is Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode),
(MAX A/C) on, and blower
on high. Roll down the
windows for a minute to
flush out the hot air.
Adjust the controls as
needed to achieve
comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn
(A/C) on and
set the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in
(Bi-Level
Mode).
Cool & Humid Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Mix Mode) and turn
(A/C) on to keep win-
dows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If wind-
shield fogging starts to
occur, move the control
to
(Mix Mode).
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger
side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove compartment
in the open position. Driving with the glove compart-
ment open may result in injury in a collision.
Console Storage Compartment
To open, pull up on the latch and lift the cover.
The center console has a storage area which can hold
cell phones, PDAs, and other small items.
The center console can slide forward and rearward for
comfort.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a
collision.
Door Storage
Front Door Storage
Storage areas are located in the door trim panels.
Rear Door Storage
Storage areas are located in the door trim panels.
Glove Compartment
Center Console
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Seatback Storage
Located in the back of both the driver and passenger
front seats are pockets that can be used for storage.
Rear Seat Pass-Through — If Equipped
Located behind the center armrest is a pass-through
door to cargo area.
The pass-through can be opened through rear seat or
the cargo area. To open from the rear seat, pull the arm
rest down and lift the latch to release the door. To open
from the cargo area, lift the latch to release the door.
USB CONTROL
This vehicle has data/charge ports for type USB A and
C located on the central dashboard. For versions/
markets where provided, the USB A and C port located
on the back of the central console under the air vents
are charge only. Both USB C ports, for versions/markets
where provided, are Power Delivery 3.0, providing fast
charging up to 40W.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB data/charge
port will activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® fea-
tures, if equipped. For further information, refer to
“Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the Uconnect
Radio Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time, and
both ports will provide charging capabilities. Only one
port can transfer data to the system at a time.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB
port and another device is plugged into the Type C USB
port, a message will appear and allow you to select
which device to use.
Different scenarios are listed here when a non-phone
device is plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports,
and when a phone device is plugged into the smaller
and larger USB ports:
•
“A new device is now connected. Previous connec-
tion was lost.”
•
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
•
“Another device is in use through the same USB
port. Please disconnect the first device to use the
second device.”
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause
the connection to a previous device to be lost.
By using a USB cable to connect an external device:
•
The device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing the artist, track title, and album
information on the radio display.
NOTE:
Depending on track configuration, track information
may not be present on the radio display.
•
The device can be controlled using the radio buttons
to play, and browse the contents of the device.
•
The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB port.
The second row USB ports can be used to charge an
external device. These ports are charge only.
Both the front and rear USB C port have the ability for
fast charging. They are Power Delivery 3.0 and can pro-
vide charging up to 40W.
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen
that the device is not supported by the system.
Front USB Ports
1—TypeCUSBPort
2—TypeAUSBPort
Charge Only Rear USB Ports
1—TypeCUSBPort
2—TypeAUSBPort
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlets that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics and other low powered elec-
trical accessories.
The Instrument Panel Power Outlet is located in the
storage compartment under the climate control but-
tons. It will only operate when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
•
Do not connect devices, with a power rating higher
than 180 W, to the outlet. Do not use power adapt-
ers that do not fit the outlet as this may damage it.
•
All accessories connected to the battery powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
If equipped, a power outlet is located in the rear cargo area.
NOTE:
The rear cargo area power outlet can be switched from
ignition powered to battery powered. See an authorized
dealer for details.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with a power outlet
on the back of the center console.
Power outlets labeled with a key symbol are powered
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an elec-
tric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the gen-
erator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
Power Outlet
Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet — If Equipped
Rear Center Console Power Outlet — If Equipped
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi® wire-
less charging pad located below the center stack,
within the storage compartment. This charging pad is
designed to wirelessly charge your Qi® enabled mobile
phone. Qi® is a standard that allows wireless charging
of your mobile phone.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi® wireless
charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi® wireless
charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve or a spe-
cialized back plate can be purchased from your mobile
phone provider or a local electronics retailer. Please
see your phone’s Owner’s Manual for further
information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip
mat to hold your mobile phone in place, and an LED
indicator light.
Place the device inside the prepared area delimited in
the mat as shown in the image. Incorrect positioning
will prevent the phone from charging.
LED Indicator Status:
•
No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a
device. Device may not be compatible with the Qi®
standard.
•
Blue Light: Device is detected and is charging.
•
Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign object
is detected.
•
Green Light: Device has completed battery charging
(if device is equipped to transmit this information).
Important Notes Regarding This Vehicle’s Wireless
Charging Pad:
•
The presence of the NFC function active on a smart-
phone could signal malfunction anomalies.
•
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position in
order for the phone to charge.
•
To avoid interference with the key fob search, the
wireless charging pad will stop charging when any
door is opened.
•
Be sure to place the mobile device correctly (display
facing upward, and phone not covering the LED) on
the wireless charging pad.
•
Wireless charging is not as fast as when the phone
is connected to a wired charger.
•
The phone’s protective case must be removed when
placed on the wireless charging pad.
•
iPhone® 12 (including iPod®) is equipped with soft-
ware to protect the device from overheating. When
the software is active, the rate of charge is slowed
down to protect the device.
•
Phones must always be placed on the wireless
charging pad within the outline shown on the pad so
that its charging parts connect with the charging
coils of the system. Movement of the phone during
charging may prevent or slow the rate of charge.
•
Having multiple applications open on the phone
while charging will reduce the charging efficiency,
and may even shut down an application that is
actively running (i.e. Apple CarPlay®). This may also
cause the phone to overheat.
•
Wireless chargers may implement certain methods
to prevent the phone from overheating during charg-
ing such as slowing down the rate of charge. In cer-
tain instances, the device may shut down for a brief
period of time (when the device reaches a certain
temperature). If this happens, it does not mean
there is a fault with the wireless charging pad. This
may just be a protective measure to prevent dam-
age to the phone.
•
The use of multiple wireless functions at the same
time (wireless charging, Apple CarPlay®, Android
Auto™) could cause the device to overheat, resulting
in limitation of the functions or it turning off. In this
case, it is recommended to connect the system
using the USB port.
Wireless Charging Pad
Correct Phone Position
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
2
•
Do not place the key fob or any other type of metal/
magnetized object inside the mobile phone housing
or near the wireless charging pad.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the charging pad
or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. Doing so can cause
excessive heat buildup and damage to the fob. Plac-
ing the fob in close proximity of the charging pad
blocks the fob from being detected by the vehicle and
prevents the vehicle from starting.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The window controls on the driver's door control all the
door windows.
The passenger door windows can also be operated by
using the single window controls on each passenger
door trim panel. The window controls will operate only
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
down briefly and release it when you want the window
to stop.
NOTE:
•
The power window switches will remain active for up
to three minutes after the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature.
•
The power windows may be operated from outside
of the vehicle by using the key fob. For more infor-
mation, see
page 33.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a loca-
tion accessible to children, and do not leave the igni-
tion of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
in the ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The power window switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down for a short period of time,
then release, and the window will go down
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push the switch
briefly.
Anti-Pinch Protect
When closing the windows, this feature will detect any
obstruction in the path of the window and will automati-
cally retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
INITIALIZATION
If power supply is interrupted, the electric window auto-
matic operation must be reinitialized.
To perform the initialization procedure, which must be
done on each door with the doors closed, manually fully
close the window to be initialized.
Power Window Controls
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout switch (the indica-
tor light on the switch will turn on). To enable the win-
dow controls, push and release the window lockout
switch again (the indicator light on the switch will turn
off).
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs
with the rear windows open, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buf-
feting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof and power sunshade switches are
located between the sun visors on the overhead
console.
NOTE:
•
Operation of the sunroof is only possible with the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
•
You cannot have the sunshade closed when the
sunroof is open.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in
the ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
•
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
•
Do not use the sunroof and its related parts for
supporting and/or grabbing purposes. Serious per-
sonal injury may result to fingers and other body
parts as well as damage to the sunroof.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
SUNROOF
The sunroof has two programmed automatic stops for
the sunroof open position: a comfort stop position and
a full open position. The comfort stop position has been
optimized to minimize wind buffeting.
Window Lockout Switch
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Power Shade Open/Close Switch
2 — Front Panel Open/Close Switch
3 — Front Panel Vent Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
2
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from
any position. The sunroof will open fully and stop
automatically.
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from
any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop
automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
other movement of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
rearward position.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close opera-
tion will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof will
remain in a partially opened position until the switch is
operated and held again.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when Express
or Manual Open operation is initiated the sunshade will
automatically open prior to the sunroof opening.
Venting The Sunroof
Push and release the Vent button within one-half sec-
ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
is called Express Vent, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when the vent
switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically open
prior to the sunroof opening to the Vent position.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
POWER SUNSHADE
If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade cannot
be closed beyond the half open position. Pushing the
sunshade close switch when the sunroof is open/
vented and the sunshade is at half open position will
first automatically close the sunroof prior to the sun-
shade closing.
Express Open/Close
Push the sunshade switch rearward and release it
within one-half second, the sunshade will open
automatically.
Push the sunshade switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunshade will close
automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
other actuation of the sunroof switches will stop the
sunshade in a partially open position.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward, the sun-
shade will open.
Push and hold the switch forward and the sunshade will
close and stop at full closed position.
Releasing the switch while the sunshade is in motion
will stop the sunshade in a partially open position.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
The sunroof has an anti-pinch safety system capable of
detecting the presence of an obstacle during the clos-
ing movement. If an obstacle is detected, the system
intervenes and the movement of the sunroof is immedi-
ately reversed.
RE-INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Automatic operation of the sunroof must be
re-initialized in case of faulty sunroof operation. It may
also be necessary to re-initialize the sunroof after the
vehicle’s battery has been disconnected and then
reconnected.
NOTE:
The anti-pinch safety device is deactivated during the
re-initialization procedure.
Proceed as follows:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Make sure the sunroof glass and the power sun-
shade are fully closed. Release the sunroof close
switch, then push and hold it again within five sec-
onds. Continue to hold the switch while the sun-
shade fully opens, the sunroof glass fully opens,
followed by the glass fully closing then the sunshade
fully closing.
3. Release the switch once all of the operations stop.
Re-initialization of the sunroof motor is now
complete.
NOTE:
If the switch is released prior to full completion of
the operations described, the entire re-initialization
procedure must be repeated from step 1.
4. Confirm express operations for the sunroof glass
and sunshade are functional for opening and clos-
ing operations.
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear
out any debris that may have collected in the tracks.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
WARNING!
For PHEV Models: Always place the ignition in the OFF
position before opening the hood. If the ignition is in
the RUN position and the Propulsion System is active
when the hood is opened, the engine could automati-
cally start, and persons not clear of the vehicle could
be injured by the engine’s moving parts.
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located underneath the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle. The safety latch
release lever is located behind the front edge of the
hood at the center. Lift the hood slightly and reach
in at the center of the hood with a palm facing the
ground. Once contact is made with the safety latch
release lever, push it to the left to fully release the
hood.
3. Raise the hood completely. The operation is
assisted by the addition of two gas props which hold
it in the open position.
NOTE:
•
Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector
must be in PARK.
•
You may have to push down slightly on the hood
before pushing the safety latch.
•
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
•
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms
are not in motion and not in the lifted position.
•
For Hybrid models: If the vehicle was actively charg-
ing the high voltage battery when the hood was
opened, the vehicle will stop charging until the hood
is closed.
•
For Hybrid models: Electric drive mode will not be
available while the hood is open. A message will
show in the instrument cluster display to alert the
driver.
CLOSING THE HOOD
To close the hood, pull downward in a continuous
motion until the crossover point, where the gas props
no longer hold the hood open then let go.
NOTE:
•
Make sure the hood is completely closed and not
only fastened by the locking device by trying to open
it. If it is not perfectly closed, do not try to press the
hood down, but open it and repeat the procedure.
•
For PHEV Models: If the vehicle stopped charging
the high voltage battery when the hood was opened,
the vehicle will resume charging when the hood
closes.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Hood Release Location (Underneath Instrument Panel)
Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood
is fully closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle
unless the hood is fully closed, with both latches
engaged.
LIFTGATE
UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The liftgate may be released in one of several ways:
•
Key fob liftgate button (if equipped with power
liftgate)
•
Liftgate electronic release button
•
Liftgate button on headlight switch (if equipped)
•
Hands-Free Liftgate (if equipped)
The key fob will release the liftgate when the liftgate is
unlocked or locked. The electronic release button
requires the liftgate to be unlocked.
To Unlock The Liftgate
Use the key fob or the interior door unlock button on
the door panel to unlock the liftgate.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passen-
gers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the lift-
gate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
There are several different ways to close the liftgate:
•
Manually (grab the liftgate closing handle
(if equipped) and pull in a downward motion)
•
Key fob
•
Hands-free (if equipped)
•
Liftgate close or lock button (if equipped) on the
liftgate door (only visible when the liftgate is open)
NOTE:
Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in posses-
sion of the key fob because the liftgate may be locked.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the liftgate, pushing the Passive Entry button located to
the left of the electronic liftgate release button, will lock
the vehicle only.
Headlight Switch Liftgate Button
Liftgate Entry
1 — Passive Entry Lock Button
2 — Liftgate Electronic Release Button
Liftgate Buttons (If Equipped)
1 — Liftgate Close Button
2 — Liftgate Lock Button
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Use the key fob or the interior door lock button on the
door panel to lock the liftgate. The manual door locks
on the doors will not lock the liftgate.
POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened by push-
ing the liftgate button on the key fob, by
pressing the power liftgate button on the
headlight switch, or by pressing the liftgate
electronic release button on the tailgate. Push the lift-
gate button on the key fob twice within five seconds to
open or close the power liftgate.
page 41.
When you push the liftgate button on the key fob or
press the electronic liftgate release handle the when
the liftgate is in motion, it will pause.
The liftgate can be closed by pushing the liftgate button
located on the base of the liftgate. If the liftgate is in
motion, pushing the button again will reverse the
liftgate.
Open or close the liftgate by pressing the power liftgate
button on the headlight switch. To open press once,
press again to pause opening. To close, the power lift-
gate button must be pressed and held for duration of
closing process.
When the liftgate button on the key fob is pushed two
times, the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the
liftgate is opening or closing, and an audible chime can
be heard (if enabled in the Uconnect Settings
page 149).
The key fob and the headlight switch will open the lift-
gate when the liftgate is locked. The outside handle
requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the vehicle is
equipped with Passive Entry, and a valid Passive Entry
key fob is within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, pulling the
outside handle will unlock and open the liftgate.
NOTE:
•
Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in pos-
session of the key fob because the liftgate may be
locked.
•
Use the interior door lock/unlock button on the door
panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the liftgate.
The manual door locks on the doors and the exterior
door lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the
liftgate.
•
The liftgate will either unlock along with the vehicle
doors, or it will need to be unlocked by pushing the
electronic liftgate release, depending on the
selected setting in the Uconnect system
page 149.
•
The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
•
The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above
150°F (65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of
snow or ice from the liftgate before pushing any of
the power liftgate switches.
•
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position. After multiple
obstructions in the same cycle, the liftgate will auto-
matically stop and must be opened or closed
manually.
•
There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
•
The power liftgate must be in the full open position
in order for the rear liftgate close button, on the
base of the liftgate, to operate. If the liftgate is not
fully open, push the liftgate button on the key fob to
fully open the liftgate and then push it again to
close.
•
If the electronic liftgate release handle is pushed a
second time while the power liftgate is opening, the
liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual
operation.
•
If your liftgate is power closing and you put the
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power
close. However, vehicle movement may result in the
detection of an obstruction.
•
Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manu-
ally pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the
liftgate obstacle detection feature and stop the
power operation or reverse its direction.
Liftgate Entry
1 — Passive Entry Lock Button
2 — Liftgate Electronic Release Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
•
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path
is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and
latched before driving away.
•
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if
caught in the path of the liftgate. Make sure the
liftgate path is clear before activating the liftgate.
ADJUSTABLE POWER LIFTGATE
HEIGHT
The maximum height that the liftgate will open can be
adjusted and saved so that the liftgate will only open to
the desired height. To set a desired height, proceed as
follows:
1. Open the liftgate fully, then manually pull down on
the liftgate to the desired height.
2. Push and hold the lock button, located on the bot-
tom of the liftgate, for three seconds. The turn sig-
nals will flash three times to indicate successful
activation. The liftgate is now programmed to open
to the set position.
To set the saved height setting to one of four preset
positions, select the desired setting in Uconnect Set-
tings
page 149.
Power Liftgate Malfunction Procedure:
1. In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate,
the liftgate can be released by accessing the service
release feature in the latch. This can be done using
a 3 mm diameter screwdriver.
2. From inside the gate, an eyelet can be seen. Place
the screwdriver in the eyelet.
3. Rotate the screwdriver handle to actuate the lever
and release the latch.
4. If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
power liftgate functionality.
HANDS-FREE LIFTGATE —
IF EQUIPPED
To open or close the liftgate using hands-free activa-
tion, use a straight in and out kicking motion under the
vehicle activation zone in the general location below
the rear license plate. Do not move your foot sideways
or in a sweeping motion or the sensors may not detect
the motion.
Move your foot under the fascia/bumper, simulating a
kick. When you have completed this movement, with-
draw your leg. To activate the liftgate, both sensors
must detect your leg.
If it is closed, the Hands-Free Liftgate unlocks and
opens completely, and with another movement of the
foot, it stops. A further movement of the foot reverses
the direction and closes the liftgate completely, if you
do not stop it again.
If it is open, with a movement of the foot, the Hands-
Free Liftgate closes completely, and with another move-
ment of the foot, it stops. If the liftgate is stopped,
another movement of the foot will reverse the direction
and open it completely.
NOTE:
•
To conserve the battery charge, avoid performing
this operation repeatedly with the engine off.
•
Opening or closing the Hands-Free Liftgate requires
a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the door handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is
not within 5 ft (1.5 m), the liftgate will not respond
to any kicks.
•
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on or
off through the Uconnect system
page 149.
•
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature should be turned
off during jacking, tire changing, manual car wash,
and vehicle service.
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
•
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature can be activated by
any metallic object making a similar in-and-out
motion under the rear fascia/bumper, such as
cleaning using a metal broom.
•
The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when the
transmission is in PARK.
•
If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate while it
is opening or closing, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed/open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
•
There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along
these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the
open position.
•
If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstruc-
tions within the same cycle, the system will auto-
matically stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be
operated manually.
•
The power liftgate will release, but not power open,
in temperatures below −12°F (−24°C). Be sure to
remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate
before opening the liftgate.
•
If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of
time (approximately one hour), the liftgate may need
to be closed manually to reset power liftgate
functionality.
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
•
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path
is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and
latched before driving away.
•
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if
caught in the path of the liftgate. Make sure the
liftgate path is clear before activating the liftgate.
CAUTION!
The Hands-Free Liftgate can be turned off manually
in the Uconnect system to avoid unintentional
activation.
NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually
pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the liftgate
obstacle detection feature and stop the power opera-
tion or reverse its direction.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Removable Rear Shelf — If Equipped
To remove the rear shelf, proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect the two rods that support the shelf at
the eyelets.
2. Lift shelf off rear pins and remove from vehicle.
3. The rear shelf can be stored in the cargo area, or
behind the front seat backs.
Disconnect Rear Shelf Support Links
Remove Rear Shelf Pin
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
2
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be
used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels.
WARNING!
•
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a
tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat
to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
•
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying pur-
poses only, not for passengers, who should sit in
seats and use seat belts.
(Continued)
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han-
dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
•
Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
•
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
•
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
vehicle to sway.
•
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become
a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
Cargo Tie-Down Loops
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
79
3
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTIONS
1. Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
Speedometer
○
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Instrument Cluster Display
○
When the appropriate conditions exist, this dis-
play shows the instrument cluster display
messages.
○
The display always shows one of the main menu
items after ignition is placed on.
3. Tachometer
○
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
4. Fuel Gauge
○
This gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in
the ON/RUN position.
○
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located.
○
Push the center-rear edge of the fuel
filler door and release to open.
5. Oil Temperature Gauge
○
The temperature gauge shows engine oil tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range
indicates that the engine is operating
satisfactorily.
NOTE:
The Instrument Cluster Warning Indicators will illumi-
nate briefly for a bulb check when the ignition is first
cycled.
Depending on your vehicle trim, your instrument cluster
display may vary.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument clus-
ter display, which offers useful information to the driver.
With the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instru-
ment cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using the driver interactive display located on the
instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can
show you how systems are working and give you warn-
ings when they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted con-
trols allow you to scroll through and enter the main
menus and submenus. You can access the specific
information you want and make selections and
adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features a driver interac-
tive display that is located in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
Depending on your vehicle trim, your instrument cluster
display may vary.
The systems allow the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel or to control the radio:
Scan me
Instrument Cluster Display And Controls Location
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
Instrument Cluster Display Control Thumbwheel
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Push the Main Screen button to activate the Instru-
ment Cluster Display Controls.
•
Thumbwheel
Use the Thumbwheel on the right side of the steer-
ing wheel to scroll through the menu options and
submenus in the Instrument Cluster Display.
•
Thumbwheel Button
Press the Thumbwheel Button to select the high-
lighted menu option.
Main Screen Configuration — If Equipped
To customize the instrument cluster further, you are
able to select up to five tiles to display information
based on your needs.
•
Press the Main Screen menu button for the Main
Screen display.
•
Push the Main Screen button to activate the Instru-
ment Cluster Display Controls.
•
Navigate up or down using the Thumbwheel to high-
light desired Tile.
•
Press Thumbwheel to select the tile and navigate to
the selected submenu and press Thumbwheel
again to add your selection to your tile view.
•
The Main Screen options are Speedometer, Naviga-
tion, Phone, Performance, Driver Assist, and Stored
Messages.
Cluster Display Layouts
You may toggle through the different Cluster Display
Layouts by pressing the Menu View button located at
the end of the wiper/washer lever on the right hand
side of the steering column:
Cluster Display Layout Selections
•
Evolved Layout — Gauges are displayed in a more
compact fashion while allowing more space to dis-
play main screens and widgets.
•
Relax Layout — Gauges are hidden, less information
is displayed on the display; however, all main
screens and widgets are available.
•
Heritage Layout — Full sized round gauges are vis-
ible, main screens and widgets are available.
The instrument cluster display is located in the center
portion of the cluster and consist of multiple sections:
•
Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will illu-
minate in gray under normal conditions, yellow for
non-critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and
white for on demand information.
•
Submenu Dots — Whenever there are submenus
available, the position within the submenus is
shown here.
•
Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
•
Gear Selector Status (PRND)
•
Driver Interactive Display (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current
Fuel Economy, Tire Pressure, and Time)
The instrument cluster display will normally display the
main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the
main menu. The main display area also displays pop-up
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible
warning or information messages. These pop-up mes-
sages fall into several categories:
•
Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous
screen. Most of the messages of this type are then
stored (as long as the condition that activated it
remains active) and can be reviewed from the “Mes-
sages” main menu item. Examples of this message
type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” and
“Low Tire Pressure.”
Main Screen Menu Button
Instrument Cluster Menu View Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81
3
•
Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until
the condition that activated the message is cleared.
Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal On”
(if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver
leaves the vehicle with the lights on).
•
Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote
Start feature. This message type is displayed until
the ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this
message type are “Remote Start Canceled - Door
Ajar” and “Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to
Start.”
•
Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous
screen. An example of this message type is “Auto-
matic High Beams On.”
OIL CHANGE RESET
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
•
Your vehicle is equipped with an
engine oil change indicator system. A
message will display in the instru-
ment cluster display for five seconds
to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval is due. The engine oil change indica-
tor system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
•
Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position.
To reset the oil change indicator after performing the
scheduled maintenance, refer to the following
procedure:
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
STOP SAFELY AND LEAVE THE
VEHICLE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE
•
This message will be displayed continuously.
•
Cannot be cleared with a button press.
•
A continuous and rapid chime will sound.
A warning will appear on the instrument panel display if
the system detects the high voltage battery has over-
heated. This can result in a vehicle fire, and the release
of toxic and/or flammable gases. To reduce the risk of a
larger fire, the vehicle’s high voltage propulsion system
will turn off within thirty seconds of displaying this
warning. At that time, the vehicle may not accelerate.
You can still steer and brake the vehicle.
Stop and park the vehicle in an open area.Haveall
passengers exit the vehicle as soon as possible and
move to a safe distance away from the vehicle. After all
passengers safely exit the vehicle, call emergency
responders immediately. Even if you do not see flames,
a fire may start at any moment, so do not attempt to
re-enter or start the vehicle.
CAUTION!
If the instrument cluster instructs you to change the
engine oil, do not reset the service indicator without
changing the oil. Engine damage may result.
CAUTION!
An overheated High Voltage Battery may result in
electrical systems damage. Do not attempt to restart
the vehicle. The vehicle must be towed to an autho-
rized dealer.
Scan me
Stop Safely And Leave The Vehicle As Soon As Possible
Warning Message
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRIC MODE TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
If Electric mode is unavailable, the reason will display
for five seconds at start up. If your check engine light
comes on, see an authorized dealer immediately.
See the following information for the most common
reasons the Electric mode would be unavailable:
Operator choices that can inhibit Electric Mode:
•
Transmission control using Paddle Shifters - Return
to auto mode to use Electric mode.
•
Heavily depressed accelerator pedal position,
requesting high power demand - Beyond the limits
of the electric drivetrain, will cause engine to run,
enabling the powertrain to produce its full combined
power available in Hybrid mode.
•
Sustained high speed operation in Electric mode -
Using the engine is more efficient for high speeds
than Electric mode.
•
Electric range is depleted - You need to recharge to
enjoy Electric mode, or you can continue normally in
Hybrid.
•
Hood open (or a hood switch fault) - This is to pre-
vent unexpected engine starts with the hood open.
Thermal protection that can inhibit Electric Mode:
•
Engine, transmission or engine starting belt too cold
- Some systems require warm-up to function prop-
erly if the ambient temperature is below 15°F.
•
Electric cabin heating capacity limits (or electric
cabin heater fault) - Unlike Battery Electric Vehicles
(BEV's), the PHEV can warm the cabin more effi-
ciently with engine heat when operating below 15°F
outside temperature.
•
HV battery, motors or contactors over temperature -
This is a temporary hardware protection feature.
Vehicle performance will resume once protection is
no longer required. If the vehicle performance is
accompanied with a Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL)
, have the vehicle serviced at an autho-
rized dealership.
Component protection that can inhibit Electric Mode:
•
HV battery undervoltage - Sustained EV operation at
high speed, especially with aftermarket wheels and
tires, can induce this.
•
Other electric propulsion system faults indicated by
a MIL - Please see an authorized dealer for service.
•
Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode - See the following
section.
FUEL AND OIL REFRESH MODE
Since it is possible to operate this vehicle for extended
periods of time without running the gas engine, the fuel
within the vehicle’s fuel tank can become stale or the
engine oil’s lubricating properties can be reduced. To
prevent engine and/or fuel system damage due to stale
fuel, as well as maintaining internal engine lubrication,
this vehicle is equipped with a Fuel and Oil Refresh
Mode.
NOTE:
If the vehicle enters Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode to main-
tain engine lubrication, adding fuel will not exit the
mode sooner.
The vehicle will automatically enter into the Fuel and Oil
Refresh Mode to minimize potential for stale fuel, and
to ensure lubrication of internal engine components.
When operating in this mode, the gas engine will run to
provide vehicle propulsion (electric only operation is
inhibited). A message will be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster whenever Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode is
active.
Electric Mode Temporarily Unavailable Message
Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode Message
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83
3
The vehicle will automatically exit the Fuel and Oil
Refresh Mode when fuel and lubrication conditions
have been satisfied. If the vehicle enters Fuel and Oil
Refresh Mode, due to fuel which has been in the fuel
tank for a long period of time (becoming stale fuel), the
engine will run whenever the vehicle is operational (no
electric only operation) until the low fuel level warning is
activated. It is also possible to exit the Fuel and Oil
Refresh Mode sooner by adding a minimum of four gal-
lons of new fuel to the vehicle’s fuel tank.
If the vehicle enters Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode to main-
tain engine lubrication properties, the engine may run
for a period of up to 2.5 hours when fully warm when-
ever the vehicle is operational (no electric only opera-
tion). If the vehicle is shut down before conditions to
exit the refresh mode have been satisfied, the engine
may run for additional time on subsequent trips. Oil
refresh may take significantly longer in freezing
temperatures.
NOTE:
•
Frequent short trips at low ambient temperature
conditions where the engine does not reach normal
operating temperatures are more likely to trigger the
Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode.
•
Electric drive mode will be temporarily unavailable
while the Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode is active. Do
not attempt to return to Electric mode until the Fuel
and Oil Refresh Mode cycle is complete.
CAUTION!
If the instrument cluster instructs you to change the
engine oil, do not reset the service indicator without
changing the oil. Engine damage may result.
POWER STEERING CHECK
MESSAGE
Presence of a "Have power steering checked" warning
message and/or Electronic Power Steering (EPS)
warning light on the instrument cluster display could
indicate that there has been a loss of steering angle
calibration.
A battery replacement or disruption of power may
cause this (i.e., battery disconnect). Performing a Lock-
to-Lock Steering Angle Calibration may correct this
condition.
page 108
GEAR SHIFT INDICATOR (GSI) —
IF EQUIPPED
The GSI system is enabled on vehicles with a manual
transmission, or when a vehicle with an automatic
transmission is in manual shift mode. The GSI provides
the driver with a visual indication when the recom-
mended gear shift point has been reached. This indica-
tion notifies the driver that changing gear will allow a
reduction in fuel consumption. When the up shift indi-
cator is shown on the instrument cluster display, the
GSI is advising the driver to engage a higher gear. When
the down shift indicator is shown on the display, the GSI
is advising the driver to engage a lower gear.
The GSI remains illuminated until the driver changes
gears, or the driving conditions return to a situation
where changing gear is not required to improve fuel
consumption.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
MENU ITEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the
main menu items for several features. Use the up
and down arrow buttons to scroll through the
driver interactive display menu options until the desired
menu is reached.
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items display in
the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may
vary depending on your vehicle features.
Have Power Steering Checked Warning Message
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Main Menu
Use the Thumbwheel to scroll Up and Down through the
Menu options. Press the Thumbwheel to enter and exit
the highlighted menu option.
NOTE:
These Menu options may vary based on your vehicles
trim level.
SPEEDOMETER
The Speedometer menu options may consist of the fol-
lowing:
•
Digital speed and speed unit (MPH or km/h)
•
Gear Shift Indicator (GSI)
•
Gear
•
Drive mode name
The speed units can be changed from MPH to km/h by
pressing the Thumbwheel.
ODOMETER
The odometer may be visible on:
•
Cluster Start-Up Animation
•
Speedometer Page
•
Trip A/B Widget
NAVIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
Turn the Thumbwheel up or down to increase or
decrease the zoom on this screen. Press the Thumb-
wheel to go back to the initial frame. The zoom level is
automatically reset to the factory settings whenever the
engine is restarted.
The following information is shown:
•
Direction Indicators
•
Distance to next change of direction (in miles or kilo-
meters, depending on instrument panel settings)
•
Suggested lanes
•
Address of the road to be followed after the change
of direction
Press and hold the Thumbwheel to disable the indica-
tions in the right-hand ring for the current navigation. If
a predicted route is selected, the route shall start with-
out further confirmation.
NOTE:
During projection modes (Apple CarPlay® or Android
Auto™) the native map is not available. Only native
maps are able to be displayed on the instrument cluster
display. Other non-native navigation systems can be
displayed one at a time through the radio display.
PHONE
This menu displays the current status of a phone con-
nected to the vehicle via Bluetooth®. The System sup-
ports up to two phones connected at the same time.
Information available in cluster depends on which
phone is dynamically selected by the user in each
moment (i.e. the phone in focus), to enter and select
one of the phone connected user should press
Thumbwheel
If no phone is connected, the menu will not function
when the OK button is pushed. Otherwise, if a phone is
connected, push the OK button to enter the menu. The
following items will display:
•
Recent calls: displays a list of the last 10 calls.
•
SMS reader: displays the last 10 text messages and
if they are read or unread.
•
Favorite numbers: displays a maximum of 10 favor-
ite numbers.
PERFORMANCE
Performance page content automatically changes
according to the selected drive mode.
G-meter Dynamic
This displays parameters related to car stability, the
graphs illustrate the trend of the longitudinal/lateral
accelerations (G-meter information), considering gravity
acceleration as a reference unit.
DRIVER ASSIST
The instrument cluster display displays the current
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane Keep Assist
(LKA) system settings. The information displayed
depends on ACC system status.
The Instrument Cluster Display shows the status and
settings of the driving assistance Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol, Lane Keep Assist and Active Driving Assist systems.
Any instant notifications are displayed via a pop-up
screen.
G-meter Dynamic Screen
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85
3
The instrument cluster display displays the current LKA
system settings. The information displayed depends on
Lane Keep Assist system status and the conditions that
need to be met
page 133.
STORED MESSAGES
Turn the Thumbwheel up and down until the Stored
Messages menu option is highlighted. Press the
Thumbwheel to enter and exit the Stored Messages.
Messages shown on the display via pop-up screens are
stored as long as they remain valid. You can view them
later in the central area of the “Messages” screen.
If multiple messages are present:
•
Press the Thumbwheel to access the message list.
•
Scroll through the messages by turning the Thumb-
wheel up or down. The presence or previous or next
message is indicated by gray dots.
CHARGE / POWER — IF EQUIPPED
The “Charge / Power” function shows the instanta-
neously available power on the instrument panel
display.
This information is to inform the driver about the drive
mode of the vehicle, if the vehicle is in charge status or
power status, and if the vehicle is being powered by the
engine, battery, or hybrid.
Charge/Power info can be represented by a gauge with
different bar graph filling according to the current state
of the battery (charging / discharging).Current battery’s
and engine’s state will be shown using different bar
graph filling colors.
Charge / Power Visualization
•
Sport: Battery level bar graph. No highlight for criti-
cal battery level is shown as the State of Charge
(SOC) approaches the lower level, and the bar graph
will be linear.
•
Hybrid, Electric and e-Save: Hybrid info Range to
empty composed by three range values, Total
Range, Electric, and Fuel. Units to be shown accord-
ing with the set selection.
HYBRID INFO
Efficiency Coach
Efficiency Coach will monitor your current driving to
help you drive as efficient as possible.
•
“Accel” is based on amount of acceleration (Differ-
ent from MPG).
○ The gauge will only move up when accelerator
pedal is pushed (or accelerating with Cruise Con-
trol or ACC).
○ Above a certain rate of change will be considered
inefficient.
○ The color of the gauge bar will change from green
to yellow to orange.
•
“Brake” is based on amount of deceleration (slow-
ing down).
○ The gauge will only move down when brake pedal
is pushed (or decelerating with Cruise Control or
ACC).
○ The color of the gauge bar will change from green
to yellow to orange.
•
The gauge bar color will transition smoothly up and
down, and have a gradual change based on
efficiency.
○ Center of gauge is 0% Accel and 0% Brake.
○ +/-0-35% of gauge fills green, +/-36-80% yellow,
and +/-81-100% orange (with a blend between
each color).
E-Drive Mode
•
Hybrid automatically adapts for most efficient
driving.
•
Electric mode saves fuel for later use.
•
e-Save mode saves battery for later use.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY
SAVER MODE MESSAGE —
ELECTRICAL LOAD REDUCTION
ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sen-
sor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electri-
cal system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure,
or the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, elec-
trical load reduction actions will take place to extend
the driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is
done by reducing power to or turning off non-essential
electrical loads.
Charge/Power Screen
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Load reduction is only active when the engine is run-
ning. It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due
to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the
current drive cycle.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge
at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
•
The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a diagnos-
tic on the charging system continuously.
•
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indi-
cate a problem with the charging system
page 88.
The electrical loads that may be switched off
(if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
effected by load reduction:
•
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
•
Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
•
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
•
HVAC System
•
150W Power Inverter System
•
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
the following conditions:
•
The charging system cannot deliver enough electri-
cal power to the vehicle system because the electri-
cal loads are larger than the capability of charging
system. The charging system is still functioning
properly.
•
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB
ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping).
•
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec-
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and simi-
lar devices.
•
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
•
The vehicle was parked for an extended period of
time (weeks, months).
•
The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
•
The battery was discharged by an electrical load left
on when the vehicle was parked.
•
The battery was used for an extended period with
the engine not running to supply radio, lights, char-
gers, +12 Volts portable appliances like vacuum
cleaners, game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
•
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
○ Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
○ Check what may be plugged into power outlets
+12 Volts, 150W, USB ports
○ Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
○ Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
•
Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories,
audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if
any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents).
•
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
•
The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips
and the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern
did not help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which
you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always
refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a
failure indication. All active telltales will display first if
applicable. The system check menu may appear differ-
ent based upon equipment options and current vehicle
status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a
fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on
until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on dur-
ing startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87
3
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark
on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible
brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem
with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until
the condition has been corrected. If the problem is
related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run
when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake
system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a colli-
sion. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault
is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system. Con-
tact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Drowsy Driver Detected Warning Light —
If Equipped
Driver drowsiness detection helps to avoid
crashes caused by fatigue by advising
drowsy drivers to take a break from driving.
Once Drowsy Driver is detected, a pop-up will
display continuously until the driver presses the Thumb-
wheel button to clear.
Once the pop-up message is cleared, it is stored until
the condition is no longer true.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS system
page 108.
Presence of a "Have power steering
checked" warning message could indicate a
loss of steering angle calibration
page 84.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the
light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the trans-
mission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake ped-
als are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is run-
ning, immediate service is required and you may experi-
ence reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or
engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The
light will come on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of
an overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too high, this
light will illuminate and a single chime will
sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL
(N) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading
does not return to normal, turn the engine off immedi-
ately and call for service
page 225.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or oth-
ers could be badly burned by steam or boiling cool-
ant. It is recommended to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats
page 240.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”,
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
hood is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the
engine as soon as possible, and contact an
authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the
engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the
hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the engine oil temperature is high. If the light
turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and
shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait
for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
Plug Status Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when a plug
status fault is detected (when vehicle not in
motion). It will be accompanied by a cluster
message indicating the type of fault. You
may receive one of the following messages if a fault is
detected:
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
3
•
Service Charging System – If you see a service
charging system message, it is recommended to
unplug and plug in again, or try a different charging
station. If an issue continues, contact an authorized
dealer.
•
Issue Detected Check External Charging Station – If
you see an issue detected message, the charging
station might be powered off, have an internal fault
or be scheduled to charge later. It is recommended
to try a different charging station. If an issue contin-
ues, then contact an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
•
Older or non-compliant J1772 EVSE models may not
support charging of this vehicle. If this vehicle does
not charge, it may be connected to a non-compliant
Level 2 EVSE, and will flash indicators. Please iden-
tify this failure to the site operator and/or EVSE
provider.
•
Before this vehicle can be driven, the EVSE Charging
Cord must be disconnected from the vehicle.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver
or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When
the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on.
When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound
page 182.
Service Hybrid System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when ser-
vice to the hybrid electric system is needed.
It will be accompanied by a message in the
cluster. If the telltale stays on or continues to
come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
SOS Battery Fault Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a
fault with the SOS Battery system. If the light
stays on or comes on during driving, we rec-
ommend you drive to the nearest service
center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
Traction Battery Fault Warning Light
This light alerts the driver that there is a fail-
ure in the Traction Battery System. Contact
an authorized dealer if illumination persists.
Torque Limited Warning Light
This warning light illuminates when vehicle
acceleration is limited due to a reduction in
engine or electric motor performance. If the
telltale stays on or continues to come on,
contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Transmission Fault Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate (together with a mes-
sage in the instrument cluster display and a
buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault. Con-
tact an authorized dealer if the message
remains after restarting the engine.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds when the Vehicle Secu-
rity system is arming, and then will flash
slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System (AVAS)
Fault Warning Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the AVAS sys-
tem is not functioning properly. If the light
stays on contact and authorized dealer for
service.
Auto Liftgate Fault Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal
when there is a fault detected with the Auto
Liftgate.
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Fuel Level Sensor Failure Warning Light
This light illuminates when there is a fuel
level sensor failure. If this light illuminates,
take it to an authorized dealer and have
them inspect it.
Active Speed Limiter Fault Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal
when there is a fault detected with the Active
Speed Limiter.
Blind Spot Detection Fault Warning
Light
This light alerts the driver that there is a
fault in the Blind Spot Detection system.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is
not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position, have the brake system
inspected by an authorized dealer.
Drowsy Driver Detected System Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Drowsy Driver Detected (DDD) system is not
operating correctly and requires service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the Electric Park Brake is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the ESC
system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position,
and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the
engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this warning
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
•
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator
Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
•
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN,
the ESC system will be on, even if it was
turned off previously.
Fuel Cutoff Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate after an
accident has occurred, and the system has
shut the fuel off.
Fuel Cutoff Failure Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate if there is a fuel cut-
off failure. If this light illuminates, take it to
an authorized dealer and have them inspect
it.
Fuel Level Sensor Failure Warning Light
This light illuminates when there is a fuel
level sensor failure. If this light illuminates,
take it to an authorized dealer and have
them inspect it.
Lane Keep Assist Warning Light —
If Equipped
The Lane Keep Assist Warning Light will be
solid yellow when the vehicle is approaching
a lane marker. The warning light will flash
when the vehicle is crossing the lane marker.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
3
Service Lane Keep Assist Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Lane Keep Assist system is not operating
and requires service. Please see an autho-
rized dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light
The Low Fuel Warning Light will turn on when
low fuel is detected in the fuel tank.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
(MIL) Warning Light
The MIL is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine
and automatic transmission control systems.
This warning light will illuminate when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition
switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The
vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions.
This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious
injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also could affect fuel economy and drive-
ability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™/Service Passive
Entry Warning Light
The telltale will illuminate in the event of
keyless system failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Rain Sensor Failure Light
The telltale will illuminate in the case of fail-
ure of the automatic windshield wiper. Con-
tact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Service Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the Forward Collision Warning Sys-
tem. Contact an authorized dealer for ser-
vice
page 176.
Service Stop/Start System Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light — If Equipped
The warning light switches on and a mes-
sage is displayed to indicate that the tire
pressure is lower than the recommended
value and/or that slow pressure loss is
occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel
consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
previously, the display will show the indications corre-
sponding to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the proper tire infla-
tion pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire fail-
ure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS mal-
function indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is rec-
ommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light
— If Equipped
This light illuminates when there is a failure
with the tow hook. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Traction Battery Cut-off Warning Light —
If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Trac-
tion Battery system is not functioning prop-
erly. Contact an authorized dealer if illumina-
tion persists.
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) Fault
Warning Light
This light will illuminate to indicate a TSR
fault. Contact an authorized dealer if the
light remains on after restarting the engine.
Transmission Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This
may occur with strenuous usage such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the
vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with
the transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the light
turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to
drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a
fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
3
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Exterior Lights Failure Indicator Light
The telltale will illuminate to indicate a fail-
ure on the following lights: Daytime Running
Lights (DRL)/parking lights/trailer turn signal
indicators (if present)/trailer lights (if
present)/side lights/turn signal indicators/low beam/
reversing light/brake lights/license plate lights.
The failure may be caused by a blown bulb or an inter-
ruption of the electrical connection. For bulb replace-
ment
page 257.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to warn you of a pos-
sible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off.
Icy Road Condition Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate during an icy road
condition.
Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm
Warning Light
This telltale will illuminate when the vehicle
security system has detected an attempt to
break into the vehicle.
NOTE:
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Warning Light could illuminate if a
problem with the system is detected. This condition will
result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Active Speed Limiter SET Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Active Speed Limiter is on and set to a spe-
cific speed
page 113.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Cruise Control is set to the desired speed
page 114.
Hold ‘n Go Indicator Light — If Equipped
Hold ’n Go keeps your vehicle at a complete
stop without you having to keep your foot on
the brake pedal. Once engaged a green
HOLD indicator will appear in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Automatic Low Beam Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator appears when the automatic
low beam headlights are on
page 56.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on.
Plug Status Indicator Light
When plugged in, the green plug indicator
light will illuminate if the Electric Vehicle
Supply Equipment (EVSE) charging plug is
securely attached to the charging port. This
indicates that the plug is detected, but doesn't mean it
is charging. It may be accompanied with a cluster mes-
sage indicating the charge status:
•
Plugged In And Charging
•
Plugged In And Waiting to Charge On A Set Schedule
•
Plugged in and Charging Complete
NOTE:
The vehicle cannot be driven until it is unplugged.
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash indepen-
dently and the corresponding exterior turn
signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indi-
cator flashes at a rapid rate.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
E-Boost Engaged Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that E-Boost mode
is currently engaged.
E-Drive Electric Mode Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the vehicle is in E-Drive Electric Mode.
Ready To Drive Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the vehicle has enough power to be
driven, regardless of the speed of the
vehicle.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator appears when the automatic
high beam headlights are on
page 56.
Automatic Low Beam Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator appears when the automatic
low beam headlights are on
page 56.
E-Boost Unavailable Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that E-Boost mode
is currently unavailable.
Idle Coasting Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The Idle Coasting/Sail feature works by
allowing engine speeds to drop to idle, sav-
ing fuel. The indicator is only seen when Idle
Coasting is chosen and active. In addition,
there is indication when this feature is active on the
Fuel Economy menu screen on your Instrument Cluster
Display.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With
the low beams activated, push the multifunc-
tion lever forward (toward the front of the
vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunc-
tion lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull
the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on,
“flash to pass” scenario.
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator shows that the automatic high
beam headlights are on
page 56.
GRAY INDICATOR LIGHTS
E-Boost Available Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that E-Boost mode
is currently available.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
3
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and auto-
matic transmission control systems. When these sys-
tems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as
emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II sys-
tem will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information
to assist your service technician in making repairs.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause fur-
ther damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a connec-
tion port to allow access to information related to the
performance of your emissions controls. Authorized
service technicians may need to access this informa-
tion to assist with the diagnosis and service of your
vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
•
ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
•
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
○ Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
○ Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal require-
ment to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass
could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is functioning and is not on when the engine is
running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be deter-
mined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail
the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things
will happen:
○
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not
ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
○
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you
can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replace-
ment, you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the previously men-
tioned test routine may then indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
3
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GAS
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust
both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat
belts.
WARNING!
•
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-
less Enter ’n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL
or PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
Place the ignition switch in the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to
start within 10 seconds, place the ignition switch in the
OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Tip Start Feature
Place the ignition switch in the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter
motor will continue to run, and will automatically disen-
gage itself when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, place the ignition switch in the OFF posi-
tion, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the
brakes before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
•
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Keyless Enter ’n Go™ Functions — Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP
button again.
Keyless Enter ’n Go™ — With Driver’s Foot Of f The
Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The Keyless Enter ’n Go™ feature operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ON/RUN,
and START. To change the ignition switch positions with-
out starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow,
these steps starting with the ignition switch in the OFF
position:
1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the OFF position.
98
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has
not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the bat-
tery to ensure a full battery charge during the crank
cycle.
2. Place the ignition in the START position and release
it when the engine starts. For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
ignition systems, press and hold the brake pedal
while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place
the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 sec-
onds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
“Extended Park Starting” procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then
repeat the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank con-
tinuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait
10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
AFTER STARTING — WARMING UP
THE ENGINE
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, and has not experienced
an Extended Park condition as identified in “Extended
Park Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there. Crank the engine for no more than 10 seconds.
This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is
flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON/RUN position,
release the accelerator pedal and repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the con-
verter and vehicle.
•
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-
erly
page 222.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
Vehicles Equipped With Electronic Key (Keyless Enter
’n Go™):
To shut off the engine with vehicle speed greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold the ignition or
push the ENGINE START/STOP button three times con-
secutively within a few seconds. The engine will shut
down, and the ignition will be placed in the ON/RUN
position.
Turning off the car (placing the ignition from the
ON/RUN position to the OFF position), the power supply
to the accessories are maintained for a period of three
minutes.
Opening the driver’s side door with the ignition in
ON/RUN will sound a short chime that reminds the
driver to place the ignition to OFF.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the window
switches remain active for up to 10 minutes. Opening a
front door will cancel this function.
After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the tem-
perature inside the engine compartment to cool before
shutting off the engine.
STARTING AND OPERATING 99
4
STARTING THE VEHICLE — PHEV
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust
both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat
belts.
WARNING!
•
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a com-
plete stop, then shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and apply the parking brake.
•
Always make sure the ignition is in the OFF posi-
tion, key fob is removed from the vehicle and
vehicle is locked.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-
less Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
Always start the vehicle with the gear selector in the
PARK (P) position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
In extreme temperatures, high or low, the high voltage
battery may need to be conditioned, and therefore may
require the vehicle to be plugged in
page 16.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with the push of a
button, the key fob may have a low or depleted battery.
In this situation, a back-up method can be used to oper-
ate the ignition switch. Put the key fob against the
ENGINE START/STOP button and push to operate the
ignition switch.
NORMAL STARTING
Achieving vehicle READY using the ENGINE START/
STOP button.
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The READY indicator will appear in the instrument
cluster display when the vehicle is in Ready to Drive
mode, which may include the start of the engine
depending on conditions such as battery state of
charge and engine temperature.
4. If you wish to terminate Ready to Drive mode, push
the button again.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch by providing three positions: OFF,
ON/RUN and STOP. To change the ignition position with-
out starting the vehicle (to power certain accessories),
follow these steps:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once, without
the brake pedal being pressed, to place the ignition
in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The vehicle is not able to be driven in the ON/RUN
position, see “Achieving vehicle READY using the
ENGINE START/STOP button” previously defined in
this section for further information.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second
time, without the brake pedal being pressed, to
return the ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle.
Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if
both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure
is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning
message will display in the instrument cluster
page 80.
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle.
Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if
both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure
is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning
message will display in the instrument cluster.
100 STARTING AND OPERATING
AFTER STARTING
To optimize energy efficiency, the vehicle will automati-
cally control engine operation.
TO TURN OFF THE VEHICLE USING
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition button indicator will return to the OFF
position.
○
If the gear selector is not in PARK, with vehicle
speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h), when the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed, the
instrument cluster display will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message, and the vehicle will
remain running.
○
If the gear selector is not in PARK, with vehicle
speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), when the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed continu-
ously for at least two seconds (or three short
pushes in a row), the vehicle ignition will exit the
Ready mode and enter Accessory mode. Never
leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
could roll.
NOTE:
•
This vehicle is equipped with an automatic shut-
down feature. If the vehicle is left in a READY state
(vehicle running) with the gear selector in PARK for
30 minutes, the vehicle will automatically turn itself
off.
•
The vehicle provides automatic notification using a
three horn chirp alert, cluster chiming, and a cluster
message (“Key Fob Has Left The Vehicle”) if the
vehicle was not turned off (still “Ready to Drive”)
and a valid key fob for the vehicle is not detected
within the passenger cabin, following the opening
and closing of any passenger compartment door
(requires all doors to be closed before the key fob
check will occur). These automatic alerts are to
remind the driver to turn off the vehicle before leav-
ing it, as well as, to let the driver know that the vehi-
cle's key fob may have been unintentionally
removed from the vehicle by an exiting passenger.
After providing the horn chirp alert, additional auto
chirps will be inhibited until the gear selector has
been moved out of PARK or ignition cycled.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades
page 277.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should
be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
PARK BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB system that offers
simple operation, and some additional features that
make the parking brake more convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways:
•
Manually, by applying the EPB switch.
•
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake fea-
ture in the Customer Programmable Features sec-
tion of the Uconnect settings
page 149.
STARTING AND OPERATING 101
4
The EPB switch is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the
switch momentarily. You may hear a sound from the
back of the vehicle while the parking brake engages.
Once the parking brake is fully engaged, the Brake
Warning Light in the instrument cluster and an indicator
on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake
pedal while you apply the parking brake, you may notice
a small amount of brake pedal movement. The parking
brake can be applied even when the ignition switch is
OFF and can only be released when the ignition switch
is in the ON/RUN position.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your foot
on the brake pedal, then push the EPB switch down
momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back of
the car while the parking brake disengages. You may
also notice a small amount of movement in the brake
pedal. Once the parking brake is fully disengaged, the
Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster and the
LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
The EPB Warning Light will illuminate if the EPB switch
is held for longer than 60 seconds in either the
released or applied position. The light will extinguish
upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
brake will automatically engage whenever the transmis-
sion is placed into PARK. If your foot is on the brake
pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal
movement while the parking brake is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically when the
ignition switch is ON/RUN, the transmission is in DRIVE
or REVERSE, the driver’s seat belt is buckled, and an
attempt is made to drive away.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, other-
wise the load on the transmission locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of
PARK. The parking brake should always be applied
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Do not rely on the parking brake to operate effec-
tively if the rear brakes have been immersed in
waterormud.
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement
and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-
less Enter ’n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-
tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
Electric Park Brake Switch
102 STARTING AND OPERATING
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary
to engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, maintain upward pressure on the EPB switch
for as long as engagement is desired. The Brake
Warning Light will illuminate, and a continuous chime
will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated
automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a
complete stop using the parking brake, when the
vehicle reaches approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the
parking brake will remain engaged.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or
repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle,
may cause serious damage to the brake system. Be
sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driv-
ing; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a
collision.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB sys-
tem, a yellow EPB Warning Light will illuminate. This
may be accompanied by the Brake Warning Light flash-
ing. In this event, urgent service of the EPB system is
required. Do not rely on the parking brake to hold the
vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brak e
The EPB can be programmed to be applied automati-
cally whenever the vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph
(3 km/h) and the transmission is placed in PARK. Auto
Park Brake is enabled and disabled by customer selec-
tion through the Customer Programmable Features sec-
tion of the Uconnect Settings
page 149.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed
by pushing the EPB switch to the release position while
the transmission is placed in PARK and the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will
engage the parking brake automatically if the vehicle is
left unsecured while the ignition switch is in ON/RUN.
For automatic transmissions, the EPB will automatically
engage if all of the following conditions are met:
•
Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
•
There is no attempt to press the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal.
•
The seat belt is unbuckled.
•
The driver’s door is open.
•
The vehicle is not in the PARK position.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the
EPB switch while the driver’s door is open and the
brake pedal is pressed. Once manually bypassed, Safe-
Hold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches
12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is turned to the OFF
position and back to ON/RUN again.
Hold ‘N Go— If Equipped
Hold ‘N Go is a comfort feature that allows the driver to
remove their foot from the brake pedal once the vehicle
has come to a stop. The vehicle must be held at a
standstill for a predetermined amount of time by
hydraulic braking. The EPB will then engage and con-
tinue to hold the vehicle at a stop until the driver
applies the accelerator pedal. Hold ‘N Go is enabled
and disabled by customer selection through the cus-
tomer programmable features section of the Uconnect
Settings
page 149.
The following conditions must be met for Hold ‘N Go to
activate:
•
Driver’s door is closed
•
Driver's seat belt is fastened
•
Vehicle is at a standstill
•
Forward gear is selected
•
EPB is not applied
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
authorized dealer.
You should only make repairs for which you have the
knowledge and the right equipment. You should only
enter Brake Service Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary
for you or your technician to push the rear piston into
the rear caliper bore. With the EPB system, this can
only be done after retracting the EPB actuator. The
actuator retraction can be done easily by entering
Brake Service Mode through the Uconnect Settings in
your vehicle. This menu-based system will guide you
through the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator
in order to perform rear brake service.
Brake Service Mode has requirements that must be
met in order to be activated:
•
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
•
The parking brake must be disabled.
•
The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
•
The EPB switch not activated.
•
The vehicle ignition in the ON/RUN position.
•
The brake pedal not pressed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 103
4
While in Service Mode, the EPB Warning Light will flash
continuously while the ignition switch is in ON/RUN.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instrument
cluster display if Brake Service Mode cannot be
activated.
When Brake Service Mode work is complete, the follow-
ing steps must be followed to reset the parking brake
system to normal operation:
•
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
•
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
•
Apply the EPB Switch.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instrument
cluster display if Brake Service Mode cannot be
deactivated.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting
out of PARK.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK (P) position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before exiting the vehicle.
•
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL (N)
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
•
The vehicle may not engage a newly selected gear
when shifting between PARK, REVERSE (R), or
DRIVE (D) if the vehicle is moving while shifting.
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
•
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
104 STARTING AND OPERATING
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK (P)
before the ignition can be turned to the OFF position.
This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the
vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK. This
system maintains lock of the transmission in PARK
whenever the ignition is in the OFF position.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
INTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK (P) unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
(whether the engine is running or not), and the brake
pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be
pressed to shift from NEUTRAL (N) into DRIVE (D) or
REVERSE (R) when the vehicle is stopped or moving at
low speeds.
6-SPEED OR 9-SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 6-speed or
9-speed automatic transmission, depending on model.
This section describes operation of both the 6-speed
and 9-speed transmissions.
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster.
To select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or forward. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmis-
sion out of PARK (P) (or NEUTRAL (N), when the vehicle
is stopped or moving at low speeds). Select the DRIVE
(D) range for normal driving.
NOTE:
•
The transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
and precision shifts will develop within a few hun-
dred miles (kilometers).
•
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selec-
tor position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects REVERSE (R) while driving
forward), the position indicator will blink continu-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its
shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with envi-
ronmental and road conditions.
The 9-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles.
Software and calibration are refined to optimize the
customer’s driving experience and fuel economy. By
design, some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize
NINTH gear only in very specific driving situations and
conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal
when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift
positions. Manual shifts can be made using the
AutoStick shift control
page 107. Moving the gear
selector into the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position) activates AutoStick mode, providing
manual shift control and displaying the current gear in
the instrument cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc.). Toggling the
gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the
AutoStick position will manually select the transmission
gear.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission
gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D]
position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting out of
PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
Gear Selector
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
4
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking
the transmission. The engine can be started in this
range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
When parking on a steep slope the use of wheel chocks
is recommended.
CAUTION!
•
Before moving the transmission gear selector out
of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
position, and also press the brake pedal. Other-
wise, damage to the gear selector could result.
•
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have properly engaged the transmission into the
PARK position:
•
When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on
the gear selector, and firmly move the selector all
the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
•
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
•
With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the igni-
tion to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing
page 146.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle
page 227.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift
control to select a lower gear
page 107. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-
ing limits, the transmission controller may modify the
transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque,
and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent transmission dam-
age due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate, and
the transmission may operate differently until the trans-
mission cools down.
106 STARTING AND OPERATING
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and/or transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
improves warm-up time of the engine and transmission
to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the
torque converter clutch (and, for the 9-speed, shifts into
EIGHTH or NINTH gear), are inhibited until the engine
and/or transmission is warm. Normal operation will
resume once the temperature(s) have risen to a suit-
able level.
AUTOSTICK – IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This feature
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear selector (in the
MANUAL position), or the paddle shifters to the
MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE (D) position), or
tap one of the paddle shifters on the steering wheel.
Tapping the (-) paddle shifter to enter AutoStick mode
will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear,
while tapping (+) to enter AutoStick mode will retain the
current gear. The current transmission gear will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when the driver moves the gear selector rearward
(+) or forward (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed
condition would result. It will remain in the selected
gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen,
except as follows:
•
6-speed transmissions will automatically upshift
when necessary to prevent engine over-speed.
•
The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
•
The transmission will automatically downshift to
FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the
driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission
as the vehicle is accelerated.
•
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or SECOND
gear (or THIRD gear, in 6-speed models). Tapping (+)
(at a stop) will allow starting in SECOND gear. Start-
ing out in SECOND gear can be helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
•
If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
•
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
•
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
•
Holding the (-) paddle pressed, or holding the gear
selector in the (-) position, will downshift the trans-
mission to the lowest gear possible at the current
speed.
•
The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector
to the DRIVE (D) position, or press and hold the (+)
paddle shifter until "D" is indicated in the instrument
cluster. You can shift in or out of AutoStick mode at any
time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Paddle Shifters
1 — (–) Shift Paddle
2 — (+) Shift Paddle
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
4
TRANSMISSION LIMP HOME MODE
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the trans-
mission may operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain
in NEUTRAL (N). The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode may allow the
vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service
without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing
the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if possible. If
not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition until the engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is
no longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend
that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest pos-
sible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmis-
sion. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or dur-
ing some accelerations, the clutch automatically
disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
engine and/or transmission is warm (usually after 1 to
3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine
speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not
engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shift-
ing properly when the vehicle is cold. This is normal.
The torque converter clutch will function normally once
the powertrain is sufficiently warm.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive (AWD).
The system is automatic with no driver inputs or addi-
tional driving skills required. Under normal driving con-
ditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction. If
the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to
the rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input
(where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent
to the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle
launch and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size
may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of maneuverabil-
ity. The electric power steering system adapts to differ-
ent driving conditions.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the “HAVE POWER STEERING CHECKED”,
SERVICE POWER STEERING” or “POWER
STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE SYSTEM”
message and a steering wheel icon display
on the instrument cluster, it indicates that the vehicle
needs service. It may be necessary to perform a Steer-
ing Lock-to-Lock Steering Calibration maneuver by turn-
ing the steering wheel from full left position to full right
position. If the problem is still present, take the vehicle
to an authorized dealer for service. It is likely the
vehicle has lost power steering assistance
page 84.
108 STARTING AND OPERATING
Performing Lock-to-Lock Steering Angle Calibration
1. Start the engine.
2. With the wheels initially in a straight forward tire
position, turn the steering wheel to the full right lock
position, do not apply any pressure and hold for
approximately 5 seconds until feeling kickback from
the steering wheel.
3. Then turn the steering wheel to the full left lock
position, do not apply any pressure and hold for
approximately 5 seconds until feeling kickback from
the steering wheel.
4. Return the steering wheel to the straight forward tire
position and set the ignition to the OFF position,
wait for all lights to turn off on the instrument
cluster.
5. Then set the ignition to the ON position.
The steering angle calibration should now be calibrated.
If an EPS warning message/indicator light persists,
please see an authorized dealer for service.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT - PER-
FORMANCE MAY BE LIMITED” message and
a steering wheel icon display on the instru-
ment cluster, it indicates that extreme steer-
ing maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an
over temperature condition in the electric power steer-
ing system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition no
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, pull over
and let the vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
turns off
page 80.
NOTE:
•
Even if the power steering system is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
•
If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer
for service.
ALFA DNA SELECTOR — GAS
ALFA DNA SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with an Alfa DNA system selec-
tor (located on the center console). There are up to
three modes of operation to be selected according to
driving style and road conditions:
•
d = Dynamic (sports driving).
•
n = Natural (driving in normal conditions).
•
a = Stop/Start OFF.
•
= Adjusts the calibration of the active suspen-
sion (if equipped).
When the engine is stopped, the selector returns to “n”
Natural Mode.
The symbol for the active mode illuminates red on the
selector.
On the instrument cluster display, the different modes
are characterized by different colors:
•
Dynamic = Red
•
Natural = Blue
•
Stop/Start OFF = Green
Each Drive Mode's Performance screen is graphically
different in frame color and content.
DRIVING MODES
Dynamic Mode
To activate Dynamic Mode rotate the selector to the
letter “d”; the display will illuminate red.
The Traction Control System (TCS), Anti-Spin Regulation
(ASR), Brakes Lock Differential (BLD) and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) systems have intervention
thresholds that ensure more enjoyable, sportier driving
while guaranteeing the stability of the vehicle.
The engine and transmission adopt a sports mapping.
WARNING!
In Dynamic Mode, the sensitivity of the accelerator
pedal increases considerably. Consequently, driving is
less fluid and comfortable. The driver must ensure
full control of the vehicle at all times to avoid a
collision.
Alfa DNA System Selector
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
4
The Performance screen displays parameters related to
vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the trend of the
longitudinal/lateral accelerations (G-meter information),
considering gravity acceleration as a reference unit.
Lateral acceleration peaks are displayed on the right.
Natural Mode
Natural Mode is characterized by reduced engine per-
formance and ECO shifting strategies for the automatic
transmission.
To activate Natural Mode rotate the selector to the let-
ter “n”; the display will illuminate blue.
The Performance screen shows the average and instan-
taneous fuel consumptions.
Stop/Start OFF Mode
To activate Stop/Start OFF Mode rotate the selector to
the letter “a”; the display will illuminate green.
When in this mode the Stop/Start system will be
deactivated.
Driving Mode Deactivation
To deactivate any Drive Mode, simply move the selector
to any other mode.
NOTE:
The DNA selector will return to Natural Mode on every
ignition off cycle regardless of which mode was
selected during the drive cycle.
ALFA DNA SELECTOR — HYBRID
ALFA DNA SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with an Alfa DNA system selec-
tor (located on the center console). There are three
modes of operation to select according to driving style
and road conditions:
•
d = Dynamic (sports driving).
•
n = Natural (driving in normal conditions).
•
a = Advanced Efficiency (electric only mode).
•
= Adjusts the calibration of the active suspen-
sion (if equipped).
When the ignition is cycled to OFF, the selector returns
to “n” Natural, unless “a” Advanced Efficiency was pre-
viously selected.
The symbol for the active mode illuminates red on the
selector.
On the instrument cluster display, the different modes
are characterized by different colors:
•
Dynamic = Red
•
Natural = Blue
•
Advanced Efficiency = Green
Each Drive Mode's Performance screen is graphically
different in frame color and content.
DRIVING MODES
Dynamic Mode
To activate Dynamic Mode rotate the selector to the
letter “d”; the display will illuminate red.
Dynamic Mode uses the both the electric motor and the
gas engine to provide a sporty driving performance by
sharpening the throttle responses, adjusting higher
transmission shifts and increasing the regenerative
power during decelerations.
WARNING!
In Dynamic Mode, the sensitivity of the accelerator
pedal increases considerably. Consequently, driving is
less fluid and comfortable. The driver must ensure
full control of the vehicle at all times to avoid a
collision.
Natural Mode
To activate Natural Mode rotate the selector to the “n”;
the display will illuminate blue.
Alfa DNA System Selector
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
Natural Mode uses both the electric motor and gas
engine to optimize power and minimize fuel consump-
tion. This mode will maximize the use of the high volt-
age battery until the battery reaches the minimum
charge level and then the gasoline engine will be used
to power the vehicle.
The Performance screen shows the average and instan-
taneous fuel consumptions. This screen also displays
parameters related to vehicle stability, the graphs illus-
trate the trend of the longitudinal/lateral accelerations
(G-meter information), considering gravity acceleration
as a reference unit.
Lateral acceleration peaks are displayed on the right.
Advanced Efficiency Mode
To activate Advanced Efficiency Mode rotate the selec-
tor the letter “a”; the display will illuminate green.
Advanced Efficiency Mode will use electric motor and
battery power only, provided there is a sufficient state
of charge. Advanced Efficiency Mode is ideal for city
driving and in traffic situations.
•
The system will automatically switch to Natural
Mode under full throttle accelerations or when the
battery state of charge is low.
•
The DNA selector will remain in Advanced Efficiency
Mode after ignition OFF cycle provided certain crite-
ria has been met (driving style, battery temperature,
etc.,) otherwise the system will return to “n” or Natu-
ral Mode.
ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION (AAS) —
IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle's electronic suspension management sys-
tem is aimed at optimizing the vehicle's performance.
The system continuously monitors the damping of the
suspension through the actuator installed on each
shock absorber. This way, the calibration of the shock
absorbers can be adjusted to the conditions of the road
surface and to the dynamic conditions of the vehicle,
improving its comfort and road holding.
The driver can choose, even while driving (only in
“Dynamic” mode), between two types of suspension
calibration: a sportier or a more comfortable one.
By pushing the button, the system changes the shock
absorber calibration.
In case of a system failure, the shock absorber symbol
will illuminate on the button and a dedicated message
will appear in the instrument cluster display.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is designed to reduce fuel con-
sumption. The system will stop the engine automatically
during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met.
Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator
pedal will automatically restart the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy-duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine
parts, to handle the additional engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
customer engine start. At that time, the system will go
into STOP/START READY.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
Occur:
•
The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
“STOP/START READY” message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
section
page 80.
•
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
•
The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
the zero position, and the Stop/Start telltale will illumi-
nate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings
will be maintained upon return to an engine-running
condition.
Alfa Active Suspension Button
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
4
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE
DOES NOT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/
Start system may be viewed in the instrument cluster
display Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations
the engine will not stop:
•
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
•
Driver’s door is not closed.
•
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
•
Battery charge is low.
•
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
•
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
•
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
•
HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
•
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
•
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
•
Hood is open.
•
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
•
Accelerator pedal input.
•
Engine temperature is too high.
•
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been achieved
from previous Autostop.
•
Steering angle beyond threshold.
•
Adaptive Cruise Control is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of
the items listed previously.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
AUTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the accelerator pedal is
pressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage
upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto-
matically While In Autostop Mode:
•
The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE
(D).
•
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
•
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
•
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
•
Battery voltage drops too low.
•
Stop/Start OFF switch is pressed.
•
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
•
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold.
Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric
Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
•
The driver’s door is open and brake pedal released.
•
The driver’s door is open and the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled.
•
The engine hood has been opened.
•
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
If the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is applied with the
engine off, the engine may require a manual restart
and the EPB may require a manual release (press brake
pedal and press EPB switch)
page 80.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE
STOP/START SYSTEM
Rotate the Alfa DNA Selector to the letter “a” position to
turn off the Stop/Start system. The light on the switch
will illuminate. The “STOP/START OFF” message will
appear in the instrument cluster display and the
Autostop mode will be disabled
page 80.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON
condition every time the ignition is turned off and back
on.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE
STOP/START SYSTEM
Rotate the Alfa DNA Selector to any other mode to turn
Stop/Start back on.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE
STOP/START SYSTEM” message and a yellow Stop/
Start telltale will appear in the instrument cluster dis-
play
page 80.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
appears in the instrument cluster display, have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized dealer.
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
ACTIVE SPEED LIMITER — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to program the maximum speed
of travel for your vehicle.
The Active Speed Limiter is turned on/off using the
Mode button located on the left side of the steering
wheel.
NOTE:
•
The Mode button also activates the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system. Pushing the Mode button will
switch between activating the Active Speed Limiter
or the Adaptive Cruise Control systems. They cannot
be active at the same time.
•
The Active Speed Limiter can be set while the
vehicle is in motion, or with the gear selector in the
PARK position.
ACTIVATION
To activate the feature, push the Mode button located
on the left side of the steering wheel. A white indicator
light in the instrument cluster display to signal that
Active Speed Limiter has been enabled.
After the Active Speed Limiter system is enabled, acti-
vate the system by setting the speed limit of the vehicle
by pushing the SET switch upward or downward.
Pushing the SET switch upward or downward to the first
detent, and releasing, will result ina1mph(1km/h)
speed adjustment. Each subsequent movement of the
switch to the first detent will result in an adjustment of
1 mph (1 km/h).
If the switch is pushed upward or downward briefly to
the second detent, the set speed will adjust in 5 mph
(10 km/h) increments. The new set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
If the switch is held upward or downward, the set speed
will continue to adjust until the switch is released.
NOTE:
•
Once the speed as been set, the indicator light in
the instrument cluster display will change to green.
•
If Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) or the Active Speed
Limiter is active when the ignition is placed in the
OFF position, it will remain activated when the
vehicle is started again.
•
ACC will be unavailable while the Active Speed Lim-
iter is in use.
EXCEEDING THE SET SPEED
By fully pressing the accelerator pedal, the pro-
grammed maximum speed can be exceeded while the
device is active.
In the event that the Active Speed Limiter set value is
exceeded manually with a driver acceleration, an
audible chime will sound. The indicator light will flash
rapidly, and a message will appear in the instrument
cluster display.
The feature will remain disabled until the vehicle speed
drops below the set Active Speed Limiter value, where it
will reactivate automatically.
NOTE:
While driving at a higher speed than previously set, the
set limit can be updated by pushing the SET switch
upward or downward to the new desired speed.
DEACTIVATION
To turn off Active Speed Limiter, push the Mode button
again. The indicator light in the instrument cluster dis-
play will no longer be illuminated to confirm that the
feature has been turned off, and Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol will be active.
The Active Speed Limiter can be deactivated by press-
ing the CANC button. In this case, the system is not
completely turned off, and the driver can reactivate the
Active Speed Limiter by pressing the RES button to the
previously set speed.
Mode Button
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
4
INTELLIGENT SPEED ASSIST (ISA) —
IF EQUIPPED
The Intelligent Speed Assist (ISA) system
combines the Active Speed Limiter and Traf-
fic Sign Recognition (TSR) systems to auto-
matically adjust the maximum speed of the
vehicle based on detected speed limit signs.
When the ISA system is activated, the maximum speed
of the vehicle will be adjusted according to the detected
traffic signs depending on the Sign Capture Mode
selected within Uconnect Settings
page 149.
ACTIVATION
To activate the feature, make sure the Traffic Sign Rec-
ognition (TSR), and Intelligent Speed Assist (ISA) sys-
tems are both enabled within Uconnect Settings
page 149, then activate the Active Speed Limiter
system by pushing the Mode button located on the left
of the steering wheel.
The white ISA indicator light in the instrument cluster
display will illuminate to signal that the system has
been enabled, but not yet detected a speed limit sign.
NOTE:
Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable while the ISA
system is in use.
SIGN CAPTURE MODES
The way in which the ISA system sets a new maximum
vehicle speed depends on the Sign Capture Mode set
within the Uconnect system. When a new maximum
speed limit is set, the ISA indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster display will change from white to green.
Confirmation Mode
When Confirmation Mode is selected, and the Traffic
Sign Recognition (TSR) system detects a new speed
limit sign, the driver will confirm this new speed by
pushing the SET switch upward briefly, then releasing.
This confirmation of the new speed must be done
within five seconds of a newly detect speed limit sign
being shown in the instrument cluster display.
Automatic Mode
When Automatic Mode is selected, the ISA system will
automatically adjust the maximum vehicle speed when
the TSR system detects a new speed limit sign. The new
speed is shown in the instrument cluster display.
The driver can reject this new speed by pushing the SET
switch upward briefly, then releasing within five sec-
onds of the new speed limit sign being detected and
the speed being adjusted.
NOTE:
If a newly detected speed limit sign indicates a speed
higher or lower than the current maximum speed limit
of the Active Speed Limiter system, a message along
with an up arrow or a down arrow will appear in the
instrument cluster display to alert the driver.
EXCEEDING THE SET SPEED
By fully pressing the accelerator pedal, the maximum
set speed of the vehicle can be exceeded while the sys-
tem is active.
When the maximum set speed is exceeded, the green
indicator light on the instrument cluster display will
blink until the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle speed drops below the previously set maximum
vehicle speed. The ISA system will then resume normal
operation.
DEACTIVATION
The ISA system will deactivate in the following
situations:
•
When the Mode button is pushed again
•
When the TSR system is deactivated
•
When the TSR system cannot detect/display any
speed limit
•
When the TSR system detects the end of the speed
limit zone
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS
Your vehicle is equipped with the Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC) system. ACC will adjust the vehicle speed up
to the preset speed to maintain a distance with the
vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
If Active Speed Limiter is enabled, Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol will be unavailable, and vice versa.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving con-
venience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your speed. ACC utilizes a radar sensor
and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you to maintain a set speed.
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed
of the vehicle ahead.
•
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adap-
tive Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning
system.
WARNING!
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive to road, traffic, and weather condi-
tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure
safe operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
•
The ACC system:
○ Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
○ Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited by
adverse sight distance conditions.
○ Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
(Continued)
WARNING!
You should turn the ACC system off:
•
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
•
When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
•
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
•
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the left side of the steering wheel oper-
ate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) System
Status
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The information it displays depends on
ACC system status.
Push the Mode button to enable the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, all ACC visualizations will not
be shown in the instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the white ACC icon will illumi-
nate above dashes in place of a speed in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push
the SET switch up or down briefly, then release. When
the ACC speed is set, the green ACC icon over the set
speed will illuminate in the instrument cluster display.
When the ACC menu screen is not being viewed in the
instrument cluster display, a green triangle will illumi-
nate on the speedometer at the location of the set
speed.
NOTE:
If the ACC system is canceled or paused, the triangle on
the speedometer will change to white, indicating the
saved set speed for when the RES button pushed.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — RES/Resume Button
2 — SET (+/-) Switch
3 — Mode Button
4 — CANC/Cancel Button
5 — Distance Setting Button
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
4
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 19 mph
(30 km/h).
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
•
When the brakes are applied
•
When the parking brake is applied
•
When the gear selector is in PARK, REVERSE or
NEUTRAL
•
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
speed range
•
When the brakes are overheated
•
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
•
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds
•
When there is a stationary vehicle in front of your
vehicle in close proximity
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Mode button located on the left
side of the steering wheel to activate ACC. Then pro-
ceed to setting the desired speed as described in the
next section.
NOTE:
Active Speed Limiter will be unavailable while ACC is in
use.
To turn the system off, push and release the Mode but-
ton again. At this time, the system will turn off and
Active Speed Limiter will be active.
The system will also turn off during any of the condi-
tions listed in “To Turn Off”
page 116.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push
the SET switch up or down briefly, then release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
WARNING!
If the Active Speed Limiter is active, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below 19 mph
(30 km/h), the set speed will default to 19 mph
(30 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is above
19 mph (30 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
•
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond
the set speed.
•
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while ACC is enabled, the system will not be control-
ling the distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be deter-
mined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel ACC:
•
The brake pedal is applied
•
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
•
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
•
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
•
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates
•
The vehicle parking brake is applied
•
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
•
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
•
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
•
The Mode button is pushed
•
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Resume
If ACC was canceled, and there is a set speed in
memory, push the RES (resume) button and remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal. The instrument
cluster display will show the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can adjust the speed by
pushing the SET switch upward or decrease the speed
by pushing the SET switch downward.
U.S. Speed (mph)
•
Pushing the SET switch upward or downward to the
first detent will result ina1mphspeed adjustment.
Each subsequent movement of the switch to the
first detent will result in an adjustment of 1 mph.
•
If the switch is pushed upward or downward briefly
to the second detent, the set speed will adjust in
5 mph increments. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
•
If the switch is held upward or downward, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the switch is
released.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•
Pushing the SET switch upward or downward to the
first detent will result ina1km/hspeed adjust-
ment. Each subsequent movement of the switch to
the first detent will result in an adjustment of
1 km/h.
•
If the switch is pushed upward or downward briefly
to the second detent, the set speed will adjust in
10 km/h increments. The new set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
•
If the switch is held upward or downward, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the switch is
released.
NOTE:
•
When you override the set speed by pushing the SET
switch upward or downward, the new set speed will
be the current speed of the vehicle.
•
When you use the SET switch to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
•
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change
on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshift-
ing may occur while climbing uphill or descending
downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to
maintain set speed. When driving uphill and down-
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking tem-
perature exceeds normal range (overheated).
TO ACCELERATE FOR PASSING
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to
pass as you would normally. When the pedal is
released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Cruise Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without Cruise
Control.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose con-
trol and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
4
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (lon-
gest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar
(short). Using this distance setting and the vehicle
speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting will show in the
instrument cluster display.
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Setting Button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (lon-
ger). Once the longest setting is reached, if the button
is pushed again it will be set to the shortest setting
available.
If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane,
the system will then adjust vehicle speed automatically
to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
•
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed.
•
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
•
The distance setting is changed.
•
The system disengages page 116.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC sys-
tem applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to main-
tain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE!” (or similar warning message) will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will sound while
ACC continues to apply its maximum braking force.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display
is a warning for the driver to take action and does not
necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide
an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to
assist in passing the vehicle. This additional accelera-
tion is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal and will only be active when passing on the left
hand side.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
LIMITED OPERATION WARNING
If a warning message appears in the instrument cluster
display indicating limited operation of the ACC system,
a fault or obstruction of the system’s radar or camera
may have occurred.
If an obstruction is detected, clean the area of the wind-
shield opposite the interior rearview mirror, where the
camera is located, as well as the area of the front
fascia/bumper where the sensor is located. Then check
that the message has disappeared.
When the conditions limiting the system function as
been corrected, normal operation will resume.
Should the fault persist, contact an authorized dealer.
Distance Settings
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene. The following are examples of these types of
situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merg-
ing in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may
move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause
your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stabil-
ity, with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is
out of the curve, the system will resume your original
set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane
changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until
it's too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may
not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-
changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to
apply the brakes if necessary.
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until
they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Offset Driving Condition Example
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing Example
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
4
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For
example, ACC will not react in situations where the
vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle
ahead is stopped in your lane. It will consider this
stopped vehicle a stationary object as it did not previ-
ously detect movement from it. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION —
IF EQUIPPED
The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system uses a cam-
era mounted on the windshield, as well as map data
when the vehicle is equipped with Navigation, to detect
recognizable road signs such as:
•
Speed limits
•
School zones
•
No passing zones
NOTE:
•
The TSR system will automatically display the road
sign detected in the unit of measurement (mph
or km/h) selected within Uconnect Settings, or
within the instrument cluster display.
•
If no speed limit signs are detected, the system will
revert to the speed limit signs that are stored in the
Navigation system.
•
The system always checks the traffic signs indicat-
ing the current speed limit signs. The system is able
to recognize and display up to two different road
signs in the instrument cluster display.
ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION
The TSR System can be enabled/disabled within the
Uconnect system
page 149. System ON is signaled
by road signs shown on the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
•
The TSR system will keep the activated/deactivated
selection in memory between key cycles.
•
Even if the system is disabled, the speed limit sign
will be displayed when the driver selects it in the
Driver Assist menu.
TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION
MODES
TSR has three selectable modes of operation that are
available through the Uconnect system.
Visual
When Visual is selected, the system will alert the driver
when the current speed of the vehicle exceeds the
detected speed limit by showing a graphic in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Visual + Chime
When Visual + Chime is selected, the system will alert
the driver when the current speed of the vehicle
exceeds the detected speed limit by showing a graphic
in the instrument cluster display, and by sounding an
audible alert. The audible alert will last for 10 seconds,
and the visual alert will remain on as long as the
vehicle is exceeding the speed limit.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the TSR sys-
tem, the radio is also muted.
TSR Off
When the TSR system is turned off, the system will not
show any traffic signs (unless selected in the Driver
Assist menu, which will show detected speed limit
signs), and no alerts will be issued to the driver.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
Detected traffic signs are shown in the instrument clus-
ter display, and can display a combination of signs at
one time (e.g. speed limit, supplemental info, and no
passing zone signs) depending on what information is
available.
NOTE:
If no speed limit is being detected, there is a fault in the
system, or the cameras are obstructed, the speed limit
sign will display with dashes instead of a number.
Supplemental Information
Supplemental information may be displayed, along with
a newly detected speed limit, indicating special circum-
stances of which the driver should be aware. Available
supplemental information includes:
•
Rain
•
Snow
•
Fog
•
School
•
Night
•
Trailer
NOTE:
Supplemental information will not be displayed when
the vehicle is ONLY equipped with GPS.
Speed Limit Exceeded
When the vehicle’s speed exceeds the displayed speed
limit, the speed limit sign on the instrument cluster dis-
play will show a red outline to alert the driver.
CAUTION!
•
Functionality may be limited or the system may not
work if the sensor is obstructed.
•
The system may have limited operation or not work
at all in weather conditions such as heavy rain,
hail, and thick fog. Strong light contrasts can influ-
ence the recognition capability of the sensor.
•
The area surrounding the sensor must not be cov-
ered with stickers or any other object.
•
Do not tamper with or perform any operations in
the area of the windshield glass directly surround-
ing the sensor.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
Clean foreign matters such as bird droppings,
insects, snow or ice on the windshield. Use non-
abrasive detergents and clean cloths to avoid
scratching the windshield.
INTELLIGENT ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
— IF EQUIPPED
The Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control (IACC) system
allows the driver to set the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) speed to be equal to the traffic signs detected by
the Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system
page 120.
ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION
IACC is enabled when ACC has been activated using the
Mode button on the left side of the steering wheel, and
either “Confirmation” or “Automatic” sign capture mode
is selected within the Uconnect system
page 149.
System ON is signaled by a green circle around the
detected road sign in the instrument cluster display.
Setting The ACC Speed Using Confirmation Mode
When Confirmation Mode is selected, and the Traffic
Sign Recognition (TSR) system detects a new speed
limit sign, the driver will confirm this new speed by
pushing the SET switch upward briefly, then releasing.
This confirmation of the new speed must be done
within five seconds of a newly detected speed limit sign
being shown in the instrument cluster display.
Traffic Signs Recognized
1 — Next Speed Limit Detected
2 — No Passing Zone Detected
3 — Current Speed Limit With Supplemental Informa-
tion (School Zone)
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
4
Setting The ACC Speed Using Automatic Mode
When Automatic Mode is selected, the ACC system will
automatically adjust the speed setting when the TSR
system detects a new speed limit sign.
The driver can reject this new speed by pushing the SET
switch upward briefly, then releasing within five sec-
onds of the new speed limit sign being detected and
the speed being adjusted.
Set the desired following distance as you normally
would using the ACC system
page 118.
ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
OPERATION
The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is combined with
the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system, and centers
the vehicle in the driving lane while traveling at speeds
up to 93 mph (150 km/h).
For ACC system operating instructions and system limi-
tations, see
page 114.
NOTE:
•
The driver should always obey traffic laws and
speed limits. Never drive above applicable speed
limit restrictions.
•
The driver can override ADA at any time by braking,
accelerating, or steering the vehicle.
Just like ACC, ADA will maintain a set speed as long as
the set distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front is maintained. ADA will also keep your vehicle
centered between the lane lines, and monitor for other
vehicles in adjacent lanes by utilizing the Blind Spot
Monitoring sensors.
ADA uses sensors within the steering wheel to measure
driver attentiveness. ADA requires the driver’s hands on
the steering wheel at all times. The system will gener-
ally aim to keep the vehicle centered in the lane, but
when the driver turns the steering wheel (e.g. to move
farther away from a large vehicle in an adjacent lane)
the system will reduce its control and enter "co-
steering" mode. While in co-steering mode, the system
will provide reduced assistance and allow the driver to
control the path of the vehicle. Once the driver stops
providing input to the steering wheel, the system will
require a few seconds to fully resume lane centering
assistance, especially during curves.
WARNING!
The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for active driver
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
be attentive of road traffic, weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead, position
in the lane compared to other vehicles, and brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete attention is
always required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
(Continued)
WARNING!
You should turn off the Active Driving Assist system:
•
When driving in complex driving situations (e.g.
urban environments, construction zones, etc.),
adverse weather or low visibility conditions (e.g.
rain, snow, fog, sleet, dust), or adverse road condi-
tions (e.g. heavy traffic, worn or missing lane mark-
ings, etc.).
•
When entering a highway off-ramp, when driving
on roads that are icy, snow covered, or slippery.
•
When driving during difficult or uncertain
conditions.
TURNING ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST
ON OR OFF
Active Driving Assist On/Off Button
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
To enable the Active Driving Assist system, proceed as
follows:
1. Push the Active Driving Assist on/off button located
on the left side of the steering wheel. The steering
wheel image will display white in the instrument
cluster display until the system is engaged. If ACC
was previously disabled, pushing this button will
activate BOTH ACC and Active Driving Assist
systems.
2. If ACC was engaged before pushing the ADA on/off
button, ACC will remain active and ADA will also
become engaged (once all other conditions are
met).
3. If the Active Speed Limiter was active before push-
ing the ADA on/off button, it will then disable and
activate ACC. Push the SET switch upward or down-
ward and release when the desired driving speed is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
4. If desired, adjust the ACC distance setting by push-
ing the Distance Setting button.
When all system conditions are met as described in
“System Engagement Conditions” in the next section,
the system will engage and the steering wheel image in
the display will change to green.
System Engagement Conditions
The following conditions must be met before the system
will engage:
•
Active Driving Assist system is enabled
•
Driver seat belt is buckled
•
System detects visible lane markings
•
Driver is not pressing the brake pedal
•
Driver door is closed
•
Vehicle is traveling below 93 mph (150 km/h)
•
Vehicle is centered in lane
•
Turn signal is not activated
•
Vehicle is not in a tight curve
•
Driver has hands on steering wheel
•
No fault warning lights for the ADA system are
present
•
No fault warning lights for the vehicle radar or cam-
era are present
NOTE:
•
The driver should always obey traffic laws and
speed limits. Never drive above applicable speed
limit restrictions.
•
The driver can override ADA at any time by braking,
accelerating, or steering the vehicle.
•
For the system to detect the driver’s hands on the
steering wheel, the wheel must be gripped on the
outside. Gripping the inside areas of the steering
wheel will not satisfy the hands-on condition to
engage the system.
System Deactivation
The system will be deactivated in any of the following
situations:
•
If the system has detected driver inattentiveness,
and has gone through all escalation warnings after
hands are no longer detected on the steering wheel
•
If the vehicle is driving in constant traffic
•
If lane markings are no longer detected
Active Driving Assist Engaged (Steering Wheel Green)
Do Not Grip Inside Of Steering Wheel
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
4
•
If the brake pedal is pressed or ACC system is
deactivated
•
If the Active Driving Assist on/off button is pushed
again (ADA will turn off)
•
If a turn signal is used (unless a target is in the blind
spot zone on the same side the turn signal is being
applied)
•
If the driver applies enough input to the steering
wheel
•
If the driver’s seat belt is released
•
If the vehicle speed exceeds 93 mph (150 km/h)
•
If the Active Driving Assist on/off button is pushed
again (ADA will turn off)
•
If the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
becomes active and is providing warnings/braking
•
If there is glare from the sun on the vehicle’s
camera
•
If the vehicle is driving on tight curves
•
If the camera has decreased visibility due to rain,
snow, etc.
•
If the driver quickly applies the accelerator pedal
NOTE:
•
Pushing the Active Driving Assist on/off button or
deactivating ACC will turn the system off. All other
deactivation conditions will place the system back
into the “enabled” state with the steering wheel indi-
cator displayed in white until all engagement condi-
tions are met again.
•
When the system is deactivated, the system status
indicator lights will turn off, the LaneSense system
will return to its previous state, and ACC will disable.
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
The Active Driving Assist system status can always be
viewed in the instrument cluster display, and status
changes are shown by changes in color of the system’s
indicator lights.
As the system detects driver inattentiveness as previ-
ously described
page 122, the system status indi-
cator lights will change from green, to yellow, to red.
The following indicators will change in color as warnings
to the driver escalate:
•
Active Driving Assist Indicator (steering wheel icon in
the instrument cluster display)
•
Glow effect of the instrument cluster display
If driver driver’s hands are not returned to the steering
wheel, the system will deactivate.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Of f
•
ADA is not turned on/enabled by the driver.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are White
•
ADA is turned on/enabled by the driver, but the sys-
tem is not actively steering or providing Cruise Con-
trol for the vehicle.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Green
•
The system detects driver attentiveness and is
actively steering and providing Cruise Control for the
vehicle.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Yellow
•
Driver inattentiveness has been detected, warning
the driver to place hands on the steering wheel.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Red
•
Driver inattentiveness is still being detected, or
driver take-over is being requested, warning the
driver to place hands on the steering wheel. This
warning is also issued when the system has
detected a tight curve and is warning the driver to
take control.
NOTE:
The driver MUST replace hands on the steering wheel
and take control of the vehicle when the system is
deactivated.
MINIMUM RISK MANEUVER
When the vehicle begins the hands-off steering wheel
warning escalation, previously described, the system
will initiate the Minimum Risk Maneuver for bringing the
vehicle to a stop.
After 23 seconds from the initial absence of the hands
on the steering wheel, the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system will apply a brake jerk to warn the driver to take
vehicle control. If, after another 3 seconds the driver
does not take the control of the vehicle, the system will
apply a second brake jerk.
If the absence of hands on the steering wheel persists,
the system will apply automatic braking to bring the
vehicle to the stop and activate the vehicle’s hazard
warning lights. After the vehicle is stopped, the system
will unlock the doors (if previously locked).
NOTE:
If the driver takes control of the vehicle during the Mini-
mum Risk Maneuver by placing hands on the steering
wheel or pressing the accelerator, the system Minimum
Risk Maneuver will be canceled, and the ADA system
will resume normal function.
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
SYSTEM STATUS
Along with changes in the system’s indicator lights
(green, yellow, and red), the system can also issue sev-
eral accompanying warnings intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate a
potential collision.
•
Two haptic brake jerk warnings will be issued (red
warning light is being issued).
•
A steering wheel vibration warning (if enabled) will
occur if the vehicle crosses a lane marker, for
example, when driving on a tight curve. The steering
wheel vibration feature can be turned on or off
within the Uconnect system
page 149.
SYSTEM OPERATION/LIMITATIONS
WARNING!
The DDD system is an aid for driving and does not
relieve the driver of the responsibility of driving the
vehicle. If you experience fatigue while driving, pull
over safely for a break without waiting for the DDD
warnings. Only return to the road when you are in the
right physical and mental condition to prevent endan-
gering yourself and other drivers.
The Active Driving Assist system DOES NOT:
•
Warn or prevent collisions with other vehicles
•
Steer your vehicle around stopped vehicles, slower
vehicles, construction equipment, pedestrians, or
animals
•
Respond to traffic lights or stop signs
•
Merge onto highways or exit off ramps
•
Turn your vehicle
•
Change lanes
•
React to cross traffic
NOTE:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a core component of
ADA. For ACC system limitations, see
page 114.
The Active Driving Assist system may have limited or
reduced functionality when one of the following condi-
tions occur:
•
The vehicle’s radar sensors and/or forward facing
camera is damaged, covered, misaligned, or
obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow, etc.)
•
If the suspension alignment is not correct, if the
vehicle is modified (e.g. lifting or lowering the sus-
pension, installing different sized wheels or tires)
•
Driving near highway toll booths
NOTE:
If damage to the windshield occurs, have the wind-
shield replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear,
and if equipped, the front fascia/bumper and a
detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward
(e.g. during a parking maneuver).
NOTE:
•
The system is designed to assist the driver and not
to substitute the driver.
•
The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's
acceleration and braking and is responsible for con-
trolling the vehicle's movements
page 127.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense is active in DRIVE or REVERSE, as long as
the system is on. The system will remain active until the
vehicle speed is increased to approximately 8 mph
(13 km/h) or above while in DRIVE or NEUTRAL, and
7 mph (11 km/h) or above while in REVERSE. While in
REVERSE and above the system's operating speed, a
warning will appear in the radio touchscreen indicating
the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become
active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to less
than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The six ParkSense sensors (four when vehicle is not
equipped with front sensors), located in the rear fascia/
bumper, and the six ParkSense sensors located in the
front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front and
behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of
view. The front sensors detect obstacles from approxi-
mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 35 inches (90 cm) from
the front fascia/bumper. The rear sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
59 inches (150 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper.
These distances depend on the location, type and ori-
entation of the obstacle in the horizontal direction.
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
4
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
the settings are selected within the Uconnect system
page 149.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
radio touchscreen, and provides visual warnings to indi-
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE, or when the
vehicle is in DRIVE or NEUTRAL and an obstacle has
been detected.
The system will determine if an obstacle is in course of
collision with the vehicle and will provide a visual
warning to the driver. The system will indicate a
detected obstacle by showing an arc in the left and/or
right front or rear regions based on the object’s dis-
tance and location relative to the vehicle. The color of
the arc depends on the distance and position of the
obstacle inside or outside the trajectory.
If the system detects an obstacle outside of the
vehicles trajectory then it will display in grey. When the
obstacle detected is on course of a collision the system
will turn yellow then red. If the obstacle detected is less
than 12 inches (30 cm) then a continuous tone will
sound and the corresponding red arc will be displayed.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
When an obstacle in course of a collision gets closer to
the vehicle the tone frequency smoothly increases. The
audible alert will remain on until one of the following
conditions occurs:
•
The vehicle is at a standstill and the gear selector is
moved out of the REVERSE position.
•
When the obstacle detected is outside of the vehicle
path.
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible
alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when
an obstacle has been detected, or if the vehicle is
stationary.
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on,
when the system is sounding an audible tone.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Uconnect system
page 149.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and
high.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
ENABLING AND DISABLING
PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch, located at the
rear of the gear selector.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the LED in the switch will illuminate,
and the display will read “Parksense Off” when the
vehicle is shifted into DRIVE or REVERSE.
NOTE:
The ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system
is active.
The ParkSense switch LED will also be illuminated
when ParkSense requires service. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster
will display a warning message associated with the
detected fault.
If "Sensor Lock" appears in the instrument cluster dis-
play, make sure the outer surface and the underside of
the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is
clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc-
tions and then cycle the ignition. If the message contin-
ues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If the "System Not Available" message appears in the
instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE
SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do
not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could
damage the sensors.
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
PRECAUTIONS
•
Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of ParkSense.
•
When you turn ParkSense off, the display will read
“Parksense Off” when the vehicle is shifted into
DRIVE or REVERSE. Furthermore, once you turn
ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition.
•
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
•
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
•
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, etc.
are attached to the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a
close object as a sensor problem, causing the “Sys-
tem Not Available” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
If any objects are attached to the fascia/bumper
within a 6.5 ft (2 m) field of view, they will interfere
and cause false alerts and possibly blockage.
•
There may be a delay in the object detection rate if
the object is moving.
•
The rear sensors are automatically deactivated
when the trailer’s electric plug is inserted in the
vehicle’s tow socket. The front sensors (if equipped)
will stay active and can provide acoustic and visual
warnings. The rear sensors are automatically reacti-
vated when the trailer's cable plug is removed.
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
•
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly be disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia/bumper when the
vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sen-
sors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
SIDE DISTANCE WARNING (SDW)
SYSTEM
The Side Distance Warning system has the function of
detecting the presence of side obstacles near the
vehicle using the parking sensors located in the front
and rear fascias/bumpers.
Side Distance Warning Display
The Side Distance Warning screen will only be displayed
if this feature is enabled within Uconnect Settings
page 149.
The system warns the driver with an acoustic signal,
and when selected, with visual indications on the radio
touchscreen display.
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
4
WARNING ALERTS
Distance
(in/cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
12 – 23 inches
(30–60cm)
Arcs-Left Red Arc Yellow Arc
Arcs-Right Red Arc Yellow Arc
Audible Alert
Chime
Audible alert only when the vehicle
is on course for a collision
Radio Volume
Reduced
Yes Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio if on
when the system is sounding an audible tone.
Activation/Deactivation
The system can operate only after driving a short dis-
tance and if the vehicle speed is between 0 and 8 mph
(0 and 13 km/h) while in DRIVE or NEUTRAL, or 7 mph
(11 km/h) in REVERSE. The system can be activated/
deactivated via the Settings menu of the Uconnect sys-
tem. If the ParkSense System is deactivated via the
ParkSense switch, then the Side Distance Warning sys-
tem will automatically be deactivated.
NOTE:
The vehicle needs to be driven approximately one car
length in order for the Side Distance Warning system to
activate.
Side Distance Warning Usage
Precautions
Some conditions may influence the performance of the
Side Distance Warning system:
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
•
Construction equipment, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
•
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
•
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
•
The presence of a tow hook without a trailer may
interfere with the correct operation of the parking
sensors. Before using the ParkSense system, it is
recommended to remove the removable tow hook
ball assembly and any attachments from the vehicle
when it is not used for towing operations. If you
leave the tow hook fitted when not towing a trailer,
the tow hook could be detected as an obstacle by
the sensors. Contact your authorized dealer to
update the ParkSense system operations.
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
Side Distance Warning System Status
1 — System Not Active
2 — System Active
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly be disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia/bumper when the
vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sen-
sors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
— IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during parallel, perpendicular, and par-
allel park exit maneuvers by identifying a proper parking
space, providing audible/visual instructions, and con-
trolling the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park
Assist system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the
driver maintains control of the accelerator, gear selec-
tor and brakes. Depending on the driver's parking
maneuver selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a par-
allel or a perpendicular parking space on either side
(i.e., driver side or passenger side), as well as exiting a
parallel parking space.
NOTE:
•
The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects,
and must intervene as required.
•
The system is designed to assist the driver and not
to substitute the driver.
•
During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being instructed to
remove their hands from the steering wheel, the
system will cancel, and the driver will be required to
manually complete the parking maneuver.
•
The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. envi-
ronmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc.,
or if searching for a parking space that has surfaces
that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
•
New vehicles from the dealership must have at least
30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully cali-
brated and performs accurately. This is due to the
system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to improve the
performance of the feature. The system will also
continuously perform the dynamic vehicle calibra-
tion to account for differences such as over or under
inflated tires and new tires.
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch, located
in front of the center console, to the rear of
the gear selector.
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system,
push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once
(LED turns on). Pushing the switch a second time will
disable the system (LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
•
Parking maneuver is complete.
•
Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h)
when searching for a parking space.
•
Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) dur-
ing active steering guidance into the parking space.
•
Steering Wheel is touched during active steering
guidance into the parking space.
•
ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist switch is
pushed.
•
Driver's door is opened.
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
4
•
Rear liftgate is opened.
•
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum number of shifts between DRIVE and
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within
the maximum amount of shifts, the system will cancel
and the instrument cluster display will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only oper-
ate and search for a parking space when the following
conditions are present:
•
Gear selector is in DRIVE.
•
Ignition is in the RUN position.
•
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
•
Driver's door is closed.
•
Rear liftgate is closed.
•
Vehicle speed is less than 18 mph (30 km/h).
•
The outer surface and the underside of the front
and rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately 15 mph
(25 km/h), the instrument cluster display will instruct
the driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will can-
cel. The driver must then reactivate the system by push-
ing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will turn off if any of the preceding conditions are not
present.
If the vehicle is in any other gear than DRIVE, and an
objected is detected, the system will default to Parallel
Park Exit. A prompt will appear in the radio screen, and
the driver will need to select “Yes” or “No” for a Parallel
Park Exit maneuver. Any other conditions will result in a
default to a Parallel Parking maneuver.
PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR
PARKING SPACE ASSISTANCE
OPERATION
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
enabled, you can select between Parallel, Perpendicu-
lar, and Parallel Park Exit maneuvers in the Uconnect
system.
NOTE:
•
When searching for a parking space, use the turn
signal to select which side of the vehicle you want to
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense
Active Park Assist system will automatically search
for a parking space on the passenger's side of the
vehicle if the turn signal is not activated.
•
The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and
clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles,
etc.).
•
The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and
free/clear of anything that may be overhanging or
protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tail-
gates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles).
•
When searching for a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending
on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as
possible.
•
The feature will only indicate the last detected park-
ing space (e.g., if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last
detected parking space for the maneuver).
•
While the vehicle is in DRIVE, there will be a full
screen image in the Uconnect display. If the driver
shifts to REVERSE while searching for a parking
space, a camera image will appear in the Uconnect
display with a “Shift To Drive” message.
When an available parking space has been found, and
the vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to
move forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular
or parallel parking sequence (depending on the type of
maneuver being performed).
Once active steering begins, a camera image will dis-
play in the Uconnect display with prompts that will dis-
play for the duration of the maneuver.
Choose Parking Maneuver Below
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands
from the steering wheel. When the vehicle comes to a
standstill (your hands still removed from the steering
wheel), you will be instructed to place the gear selector
into the REVERSE position.
The system may then instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete before then instructing to check
the vehicle’s surroundings, and move backward.
Several more gear shifts (DRIVE and REVERSE) while
keeping hands off of the steering wheel will be
instructed to the driver while checking the vehicle’s
surroundings before completing the parking maneuver.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the maneu-
ver is complete and the driver will be instructed to
check the vehicle's parking position, then shift the
vehicle into PARK. The message “Active ParkSense
Complete - Check Parking Position” will be displayed
momentarily.
NOTE:
•
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their sur-
roundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is
required.
•
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking
maneuver.
•
When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should
check their surroundings and begin to back up
slowly.
•
The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steer-
ing guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h)
that tells them to slow down. The driver is then
responsible for completing the maneuver if the sys-
tem is canceled.
•
If the system is canceled during the maneuver for
any reason, the driver must take control of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel
or perpendicular parking maneuvers even when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system.
Always check carefully behind and in front of your
vehicle, look behind and in front of you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up and moving forward. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention
to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Shift To Reverse — Parallel Parking Space
Shift To Reverse — Perpendicular Parking Space
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
4
WARNING!
•
Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist sys-
tem, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or dam-
age to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear
fascia/bumper when the vehicle sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the
ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on
its size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected.
It is recommended that the driver looks over his/
her shoulder when using the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system.
EXITING THE PARKING SPACE
NOTE:
The function does not work for exiting a perpendicular
parking space, but only exiting parallel parking spaces.
Activation
To activate this function, push the Active ParkSense
switch once, then select “Parallel Park Exit” from the
Uconnect touchscreen. After selection, the system acti-
vates and instructs the driver on the operations that
have to be carried out to perform the maneuver
correctly.
NOTE:
To ensure the proper activation of the Exiting A Parallel
Parking Space feature, the vehicle must be completely
stationary within the parking space, and the desired
exit side must be selected prior to commencing the
maneuver.
Selection Of The Maneuver Side
Use the turn signal to choose the direction that you
want to perform the maneuver. Use the right arrow indi-
cator to perform the maneuver to the right side and use
the left arrow indicator to perform the maneuver to the
left.
During the maneuver, the system instructs the driver to
shift to REVERSE, and operate the turn signal in the
direction you want to exit. Let go of the steering wheel
and use the brake or accelerator pedals as instructed,
while the system handles the steering automatically for
exiting the parking space. If the driver continues to
carry out a voluntary or involuntary action on the steer-
ing wheel during the exit maneuver (touching or holding
the steering wheel to prevent its movement), the
maneuver will be interrupted.
End Of Maneuver
The semi-automatic maneuver ends when the display
shows the message of a completed maneuver. At the
end of the maneuver, the system gives back the vehicle
control to the driver.
Shift To Reverse Then Move Backward
Shift To Drive Then Move Forward
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
Important Information
•
If the sensors undergo impact which alters their
position, the system operation could be greatly
affected.
•
The sensors reach top performance after the vehicle
has gone about 30 miles (50 km) due to the
dynamic tire circumference calculations used for
parking.
•
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
•
Construction equipment, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
•
Sensors may detect a nonexistent obstacle (echo
noise) due to mechanical noises, for example while
washing the vehicle or in the case of rain, strong
wind, and hail.
•
The sensors may not detect objects of a particular
shape or made from particular materials (very thin
poles, trailer beams, panels, nets, bushes, anti-
parking posts, pavements, rubbish bins, motor
vehicles, etc.). Always take great care to check that
the vehicle and its path are actually compatible with
the parking place identified by the system.
•
The use of wheels and tires that are different size to
the original equipment could affect the operation of
the system.
•
The operation of the rear sensors is automatically
deactivated when the trailer's electric plug is
inserted in the vehicle's tow hook socket, while the
front sensors stay active and can provide acoustic
and visual warnings. If this situation occurs, Active
Park Assist will not work. The rear sensors are auto-
matically reactivated when the trailer's cable plug is
removed.
•
In the case of parking maneuvers on roads with
inclines, the performance of the system could be
inferior and it may deactivate.
•
If a parking maneuver is being carried out between
two parked vehicles alongside a curb, the system
may cause the vehicle to drive up onto the curb.
•
Some maneuvers at very tight bends might be
impossible to be carried out.
•
Take great care to ensure that conditions do not
change during the parking maneuver (e.g. if there
are persons and/or animals in the parking place,
moving vehicles, etc.) and intervene immediately if
necessary.
•
During parking maneuvers, pay attention to vehicles
approaching from the opposite direction. Always
abide by the law and road regulations.
NOTE:
•
Correct system operation is not guaranteed if snow
chains or the compact spare tire are fitted.
•
The function only informs the driver about the last
appropriate parking place (parallel or perpendicular)
detected by the parking sensors.
•
Some messages displayed are accompanied by
audible warnings.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
The LaneSense system uses a forward facing camera to
detect lane markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic
warning in the form of torque applied to the steering
wheel to prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries. If the driver continues to unintentionally
drift out of the lane, the LaneSense system provides a
visual warning through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque to the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
visual warning through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane. When only
a single lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque)
warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the Lane-
Sense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on
the steering wheel and provides an audible warning to
the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
4
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense on/off button is located on the on the
end of the multifunction lever, to the left of the steering
wheel.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense
button. The white LaneSense telltale is shown in the
instrument cluster display with gray lane lines when the
system is first turned on until lane markings are
detected.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button again. A “LaneSense OFF” message will be
shown in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system state
on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane
drift condition through the instrument cluster display.
When the LaneSense system is on, both lane lines are
gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been
detected. The LaneSense telltale will be white.
NOTE:
When the Driver Assist screen is not selected in the
instrument cluster display, the LaneSense status will be
shown as a small icon at the bottom of the speedom-
eter. The vehicle is represented by a telltale in the
shape of a triangle that will change color along with the
lane lines as the LaneSense status changes.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
•
When the LaneSense system is on, the left lane line
will change from gray to white, and the LaneSense
telltale changes from white to green when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the system
is ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display if an unintentional lane departure
occurs.
•
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has
been approached and is in a lane departure situa-
tion, the left lane line changes from white to yellow,
and the LaneSense telltale changes from green to
yellow.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior
for a right lane departure when only the right lane
marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
•
When the LaneSense system is on, both lane lines
turn from gray to white to indicate that both of the
lane markings have been detected. The LaneSense
telltale is green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is armed and ready to pro-
vide visual warnings in the instrument cluster dis-
play, and a torque warning in the steering wheel if
an unintentional lane departure occurs.
LaneSense On/Off Button
System On (Gray Lane Lines)
Lane Approached (Yellow Lane Line)
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the left lane line turns from white to yel-
low. The LaneSense telltale changes from green to
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane,
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
•
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has
been approached and is in a lane departure situa-
tion, the yellow left lane line begins to flash. At this
time, torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane,
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior
for a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the inten-
sity of the torque warning (low/med/high) and the
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) that you can config-
ure through the Uconnect system
page 149.
NOTE:
•
When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
•
Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
•
The system will not apply torque to the steering
wheel whenever a safety system engages (Anti-Lock
Brakes, Traction Control System, Electronic Stability
Control, Forward Collision Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see
an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your
vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the Navigation/
Multimedia radio display screen along with a caution
note to “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
era delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited
and the previous screen appears.
Manual Activation Of The Back Up Camera
1. Press the Controls button located in the Vehicle Con-
trols menu, or within the Apps drawer. This button
can also be configured as a shortcut on the bottom
of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the Back Up Camera button to turn the Rear
View Camera system on.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable
modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect system
page 149.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
era delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited
and the previous screen appears. When the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned on,
Lanes Sensed (White Lane Lines)
Lane Drift Sensed (Yellow Lane Line)
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Lane Line)
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
4
the camera image will continue to be displayed for up
to 10 seconds unless the following conditions occur:
The vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
vehicle is shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is
placed in the OFF position, or the user presses the
touchscreen X button to exit out of the camera video
display.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its pro-
jected back up path based on the steering wheel posi-
tion. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a
hitch/receiver. Different colored zones indicate the dis-
tance to the rear of the vehicle. The following table
shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0-1ft(0-30cm)
Yellow 1ft-3ft(30cm-1m)
Green 3 ft - 9.5 ft (1 m - 3 m)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You
are responsible for the safety of your surroundings
and must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
Camera system that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the surroundings and Top View of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or a
different view is selected through the touchscreen but-
tons. The Top View of the vehicle will show which doors
are open. The image will be displayed on the touch-
screen display along with a caution note “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five
seconds, this note will disappear. The Surround View
Camera system is comprised of four sequential cam-
eras located in the front grille, rear liftgate and side
mirrors.
Automatic Activation Of The Surround View Camera
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear
View and Top View will automatically be displayed on
the Uconnect touchscreen.
The Surround View Camera will also automatically acti-
vate when the gear selector is in DRIVE or NEUTRAL
and the system detects obstacles it its path. Camera
view display will depend on the location of the detected
obstacle.
Manual Activation Of The Surround View Camera
1. Press the Controls or Apps button located within the
Uconnect system.
2. Press the Surround View Camera button
to enter the camera’s menu.
NOTE:
The Surround View Camera system has programmable
settings that may be selected through the Uconnect
system
page 149.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
era delay turned on, the camera image will continue to
be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted
into PARK or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
There is a touchscreen X button to disable the display
of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
era delay turned off, the Surround View Camera mode
is exited and the last known screen appears again.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle, including
the side view mirrors and its projected back up path
based on the steering wheel position.
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear
of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0-1ft(0-30cm)
Yellow 1ft-3ft(30cm-1m)
Green 3 ft - 9.5 ft (1 m - 3 m)
Modes Of Operation
Manual activation of the Surround View Camera is
selected by pressing the Surround View Camera button
located in the Controls menu within the Uconnect
system.
Top View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with
Rear View or Front View in a split screen display. There
are integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front
and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will change color from
yellow to red corresponding the distance zones to the
oncoming object.
NOTE:
•
Front tires will be in image when the tires are
turned.
•
Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the image
will appear distorted.
•
Top View will show which doors are open.
•
Open front doors will cancel outside image.
•
Open liftgate will cancel rear image while in Top
View.
Rear View Plus Top View
This is the default view of the system in
REVERSE and is always paired with the Top
View of the vehicle with optional active
guidelines for the projected path when
enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path View button
will give the driver a wider angle view of the
rear camera system.
Front View Plus Top View
Pressing the Front Plus Top View button will
show you what is immediately in front of the
vehicle and is always paired with the Top
View of the vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path View button
will give the driver a wider angle view of the
front camera system. The Top View will be
disabled when this is selected.
NOTE:
If the Rear View Camera view was selected through the
Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of the Rear
View screen will return to the last known Surround View
screen. If the Back Up Camera was manually activated
through the Controls menu of the Uconnect system,
exiting out of the display screen will return to the Con-
trols menu.
Deactivation
The system can be deactivated under the following
conditions:
•
The speed of the vehicle is greater than 8 mph
(13 km/h).
•
The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
•
The vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE and
the touchscreen X button is pressed.
•
The camera delay system is turned off manually
through the Uconnect Settings menu
page 149.
NOTE:
•
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up
on the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lenses.
•
If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see
an authorized dealer.
Top View With Rear View Screen
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
4
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Surround View Camera. Always check care-
fully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should
only be used as a parking aid. The Surround View
camera is unable to view every obstacle or object
in your drive path.
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using Surround View to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is rec-
ommended that the driver look frequently over
his/her shoulder when using Surround View.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GAS
1. Ensure that the vehicle doors are unlocked as this
unlocks the fuel door.
2. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the outer
edge of the fuel door.
NOTE:
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside
the pipe seal the system.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe; the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while
refueling.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel, and when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
5. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds after
nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from the nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel
door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light to turn on.
•
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Filler Pipe
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
Emergency Fuel Door Release
1. Open the liftgate and locate the release cap on the
rear quarter trim panel to the right side of the
vehicle.
2. Remove the release cap from the quarter trim panel
by rotating the cap 90 degrees clockwise.
NOTE:
In some cases additional leverage may be neces-
sary.
3. After removing the release cap, pull it directly away
from the quarter trim panel to release the fuel door.
4. Reinstall the release cap into the quarter trim when
completed.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — PHEV
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Put the vehicle in the PARK position.
2. Push the fuel filler door release button (located next
the headlight switch).
3. Pushing the button will initiate a sequence of events
to depressurize the fuel system. A “Vehicle is Ready
to Fuel” message will display in the cluster when the
vehicle is ready to be fueled.
Release Cap Location
Fuel Door Emergency Release Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
Instrument Cluster Message
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
4
NOTE:
○
After pushing the release button you will have
20 minutes to fuel the vehicle; beyond 20 min-
utes you will need to push the release button
again.
○
The fuel door should take 15 seconds to open
under normal conditions. It may take longer to
open in some situations, such as high ambient
temperatures.
○
If you hear a hissing sound when the fuel cap is
removed, wait to begin fueling the vehicle until
after the hissing sound stops.
4. The fuel door pops away from the vehicle when it
has been released. To finish opening the fuel door,
manually rotate it away from the vehicle.
NOTE:
○
If the service station fuel pump repeatedly clicks
off (stops delivering fuel) before the fuel tank
has been filled, push the fuel door release but-
ton again.
○
If pushing the fuel door release button a second
time does not correct the problem, try using a
different fuel pump. If premature fuel pump shut-
off continues to be a problem, take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
○
If the fuel door does not re-latch upon closure,
push the fuel door release button again to reset
the latch. If pushing the fuel door release button
a second time does not correct the problem, take
the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the
fuel door using the inside release button. Do not pry
on the door.
5. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe; the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while
refueling.
6. Fill the vehicle with fuel, and when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
7. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to
allow excess fuel to drain from nozzle.
8. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
•
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Filler Pipe
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
Emergency Fuel Door Release
1. Place the vehicle's ignition in the RUN position (Pro-
pulsion System Active (PSA) not active).
NOTE:
If this is not performed, then the tank vent valve will
not open. This will result in premature fuel pump
shutoffs.
2. Open the liftgate and locate the release cap on the
rear quarter trim panel to the right side of the
vehicle.
3. Remove the release cap from the quarter trim panel
by rotating the cap 90 degrees clockwise.
NOTE:
In some cases additional leverage may be neces-
sary.
4. After removing the release cap, pull it directly away
from the quarter trim panel to release the fuel door.
5. Reinstall the release cap into the quarter trim when
completed.
6. Wait 15 seconds and then begin fueling your
vehicle.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver's side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), front and rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), and Vehicle Identifi-
cation Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number
is included on this label and indicates the Month, Day
and Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears
on the bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front
and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Total load
must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are
not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of
the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the
cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not
exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles, or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability, do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label repre-
sents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement
tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Release Cap Location
Fuel Door Emergency Release
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
4
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle
for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle
fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants
or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle
on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo
are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be deter-
mined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for
operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been
exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the
vehicle should then be determined separately to be
sure that the load is properly distributed over the front
and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the
GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the specified
GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or
rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight
limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low
and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and
the way the brakes operate.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cover-
age, follow the requirements and recommendations in
this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do
not exceed the GVWR
page 141.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of
all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and
rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear
axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
front or rear GAWR
page 141.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose con-
trol of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load
on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by
the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that can
be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer
tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associ-
ated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a swaying
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel
brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to
eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball
or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These
kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow small and
medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A Weight-Distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more consis-
tent steering and brake control thereby enhancing tow-
ing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway con-
trol also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and
trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a Weight-
Distributing (load equalizing) Hitch are recommended
for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required
depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading
to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
requirements.
WARNING!
•
An improperly adjusted Weight-Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in a collision.
•
Weight-Distributing systems may not be compat-
ible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
Engine/Transmission GCWR Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
2.0L / 9 Speed Auto 6,503 lb (2,950 kg) 2,000 lb (907 kg) 154 lb (70 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds
Engine/Transmission GCWR Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
1.3L PHEV / 6 Speed Auto 6,878 lb (3,120 kg) 2,000 lb (907 kg) 154 lb (70 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo (i.e., the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard
page 257.
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
4
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the front/rear axles of the vehicle:
•
The trailer tongue weight.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information
Placard located on the driver’s door pillar for the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your
vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are
recommended.
CAUTION!
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in Scheduled Servicing
and the proper maintenance intervals
page 230.
When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR
ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as pos-
sible:
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to con-
trol. You could lose control of your vehicle and have
a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause
a loss of control, poor performance or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or
"chock" the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
○ GVWR
○ GTW
○ GAWR
○ Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
Weight Distribution
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
•
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a com-
pact spare tire.
•
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
•
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
•
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
•
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
•
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limits.
•
For further information page 257.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
•
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the
trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and
possible personal injury.
•
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped
with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an
electronic brake controller is not required.
•
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess
of 1,543 lb (700 kg).
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing, you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead
to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights
And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory-approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer con-
nector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
•
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle (or any other device plugged into vehicle’s
electrical connectors) before launching a boat into
water.
•
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
4
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing
up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The transmis-
sion controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent
shifting when towing. For increased engine braking on
steep downhill grades, select the LOW range.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
•
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
•
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disen-
gage until you can get back to cruising speed.
•
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads
to maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
Towing Condition Wheels Off The Ground All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
REAR NOT ALLOWED
FRONT NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Ground
2—Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provin-
cial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
•
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadver-
tent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park
Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the Cus-
tomer Programmable Features in the Uconnect
Settings.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. This vehicle
may be towed on flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all
four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Information in this section will aid in safe controlled
launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and care-
fully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
•
Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
•
Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
•
Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
•
Keep tires properly inflated.
•
Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in
a sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path's surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry your
vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shal-
low standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path's surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry your
vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
4
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles
in the way before driving through the standing
water.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
•
Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5/5 NAV
With 10.25-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect
Radio Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes
only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features
in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communica-
tions. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve
over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. As
always, if you experience unusual behavior, contact an
authorized dealer immediately,
page 278, or refer
to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for addi-
tional contact information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software)
is installed.
WARNING!
•
ONLY insert trusted media devices/components
into your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possi-
bility for vehicle systems to be breached.
•
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, contact an authorized dealer
immediately.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features, sta-
bility, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn
about available Uconnect software updates.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located
next to the shifter. These buttons allow you to access
and change Programmable Features. Many features
can vary by vehicle and packages.
The Uconnect Settings can be accessed by pressing the
Settings tab.
Push and hold the Power dial next to the shifter for a
minimum of 15 seconds to reset the radio.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURES
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.25-inch Display Buttons On
The Touchscreen And Next To The Shifter
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Radio ON/OFF And Volume Control Bar
149
5
For the Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.25-inch Display
Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings tab on
the top of the touchscreen. In this menu, the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available pro-
grammable features.
NOTE:
•
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the set-
ting is complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to the
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The
available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster Display. The available languages are
Español (Mexico), English (United States), Italiano, and Français (Canada).
Display Mode This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the
system automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Units This setting will allow you to customize the units for “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption”
(MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Torque” (Nm
or lb-ft) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Display Brightness Nighttime
Only available if Display Mode is set to “Manual”. This setting will allow you to adjust the “Brightness Nighttime” setting.
Selectable options are 1 through 10.
150 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Display Brightness Daytime Only available if Display Mode is set to “Manual”. This setting will allow you to adjust the “Brightness Daytime” setting.
Selectable options are 1 through 10.
Cluster Options This settings allows users to select which content to display in each customizable area on the Instrument Cluster Display.
Warning Cluster Buzzer Volume This setting will let you adjust the Warning Cluster Buzzer Volume. Selectable options are “Low”, “Mid”, and “High”.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster Display. The available languages are
Español (Mexico), English (United States), Italiano, and Français (Canada).
Display Mode
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows for more customization with the
radio display.
Display Brightness Nighttime This setting will allow you to adjust the “Brightness Nighttime” setting. Selectable options are 1 through 10.
Display Brightness Daytime This setting will allow you to adjust the “Brightness Daytime” setting. Selectable options are 1 through 10.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Units
This setting will allow you to customize the units for “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Current Consump-
tion” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Torque”
(lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently. Unit settings can be selected for “US”, “Metric A”, “Metric B”, “Impe-
rial”, or “Custom”.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 151
5
Setting Name Description
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be “Off” for this setting to be avail-
able. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word
This setting will allow you to set the system “Wake Up” word. The available options are “Off”, “Hey Alfa Romeo”, and “Hey
Alfa”.
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow Voice Barge-in to be turned on or off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on or off.
Ambient Color Personalization This setting will redirect to a new menu that will allow you to change the ambient lighting color in the cabin.
Navigation Settings
This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for further
information.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated
Steering Wheel
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated steering wheel when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will
only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems when-
ever the vehicle is started.
Radio Off Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is opened, the elec-
tronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 min” and “20 min”.
Radio Off With Door This setting will allow you to determine if the radio shuts off when any of the doors are opened.
Audio Settings This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings
page 161.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
New Text Message Pop-ups This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Pop-ups This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Warning Cluster Buzzer Volume This setting will let you adjust the Warning Cluster Buzzer Volume. Selectable options are “Low”, “Mid”, and “High”.
Cluster Options This setting will display options for the cluster using the Uconnect touchscreen.
152 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Comfort This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated steering wheel when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will
only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems when-
ever the vehicle is started.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
More Profile Options This setting will open up the Edit Profile tab to adjust profile name, avatar, or to delete the selected profile.
Wireless Charger Status Popups This setting will display smartphones charging status while on the wireless charger.
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ
depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the
available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Autonomous Emergency Braking— Located In
Autonomous Emergency Braking Submenu
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system on or off. The “Off” setting will deactivate the FCW sys-
tem. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active
Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Autonomous Emergency Braking Sensitivity —
Located In Autonomous Emergency Braking
Submenu
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have
the FCW system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have
the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an
object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Lane Keeping Warning — Located In Lane Keeping
Assist submenu
This setting will set the warning type for LaneSense. The available options are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
MULTIMEDIA 153
5
Setting Name Description
Lane Keeping Strength — Located In Lane Keeping
Assist submenu
This setting will set the strength of the LaneSense system. The available options are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Active Driving Assist Steering Wheel Vibration This setting will turn the Active Driving Assist Steering Wheel Vibration on or off.
Front Park Sensors Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear Park Sensors Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will provide braking assistance if the Rear ParkSense system senses a collision with an object.
Blind Spot Alert This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in the vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting
will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights
& Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Traffic Sign Recognition This setting sill turn Traffic Sign Recognition on or off.
Traffic Sign Assist This setting will turn Traffic Sign Assist on or off.
Traffic Sign Recognition Warning This setting will allow you to set the warning type related to the traffic sign. The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and
“Visual + Chime”.
New Speed Zone Indication This setting will allow you to set if the system will warn you that the speed limit has changed in an area. The available
options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
Driver Attention Assist This setting will monitor the driver’s driving habits and warn you of any changes, indicating that the driver may be drowsy.
The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Highway Assist Steering Wheel Vibration This setting will customize the Highway Assist Steering Wheel Vibration. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Side Distance Warning This setting will customize the Side Distance Warning. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Intelligent Speed Options This setting will let you customize your intelligent speed options. Selectable options are “Manual Confirm” and “Auto
Confirm”.
New Speed Zone Indication This setting will allow you to set if the system will warn you that the speed limit has changed in an area. The available
options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
Rear Seat Alert When this setting is turned on and the rear doors are opened while the engine is running, or if the engine is turned on
within 10 minutes of the door opening, a message will appear to check the rear seat when the vehicle is powered OFF.
Front Passenger Airbag This setting will let you enable or disable the Front Passenger Airbag.
154 MULTIMEDIA
Clock & Date
When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time This setting will allow you to set the hours and minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available.
The “+” setting will increase the hours or minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the hours or minutes.
Time Format This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available.
The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format. You
will also be able to adjust the clock.
Set Date This setting will allow you to set the date.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Show Time and Date During Screen Off This setting will allow you to show the time and date while the screen is off. Available options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smart-
phone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All settings menu. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones This setting will enable or disable two active phones within the vehicle. The setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
MULTIMEDIA 155
5
Voice — If Equipped
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey,
Alfa”.
Voice Barge-In This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement is completed by the system. The available
options are “On” and “Off”.
Show Command List This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will always show the Command List. The
“With Help” setting will show the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never”
setting will turn the Command List off.
Navigation — If Equipped
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which
icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
156 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
Surround View Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Rain Sensor This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Folding Side Mirrors This setting will automatically fold and unfold the side-view mirrors when the vehicle is turned off, the doors are locked, or
the key fob button is pushed. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
MULTIMEDIA 157
5
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
•
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle
purchase.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Automatic High Beams This setting will turn the Auto DimHigh Beam on or off.
Ambient Color Personalization This setting will redirect to a new menu that will allow you to change the ambient lighting color in the cabin.
Headlight Sensitivity This setting will allow you to set the sensitivity of the headlights depending on the amount of visible light. The greater the
sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset, the
headlights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2). The available levels are “Level 1: Minimum Sensitivity”, “Level 2:
Medium Sensitivity”, and “Level 3: Maximum Sensitivity”.
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Greeting Lights This setting will turn the Greeting Lights on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Headlight Dip This setting will lower the headlights when driving on the opposite side of the road. The available options are “On” and
“Off”.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Intelligent Ambient Lighting This setting will allow you to adjust the color of the ambient lighting. The available options are “Color 1” through “Color 5”.
Interior Ambient Lighting This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of the interior ambient lights. The available options are “Level 1”
through “Level 6”.
Steering Directed Headlights This setting will turn the Steering Directed Headlights on or off.
158 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
Hold ‘n Go This setting will turn the Hold 'N Go on or off.
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn
when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The
“2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
MULTIMEDIA 159
5
Setting Name Description
Remote Door Unlock/1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed to unlock all the doors. The
“Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will
unlock all doors on the first push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on or off.
Power Liftgate Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering. Selectable options are “On” and
“Off”.
Power Trunk Roof Level (Custom)
This setting will let you customize the angle of the power liftgate. Selectable options are “Custom”, “Level 1”, “Level 2”,
“Level 3”, and “Level 4”.
Hands Free Power Liftgate
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open or close the liftgate. Selectable options are “On” and
“Off”.
Seats & Comfort
When the Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been activated
or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Comfort This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated steering wheel when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will
only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems when-
ever the vehicle is started.
160 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate when the ignition is
set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Radio Off Delay This setting will keep the radio running after the engine is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deacti-
vate. The available settings are “0 min” and “20 min”.
Radio Off With Door This setting will shut the radio off when the door is opened. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the vehicle has been turned off. The
“+” will increase the amount of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
Windows With Key Fob This setting will allow you to control window function while the vehicle is off. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within
the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon
can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle
speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
MULTIMEDIA 161
5
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Radio This setting will automatically turn the radio on when the vehicle is started. The available settings are “Off”, “On”, and
“Recall Last”. With “Recall Last”, the system resumes the previous task before vehicle shut off.
Radio off With Door This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay time is reached. The available set-
tings are “On” and “Off”.
Loudness This setting improves the sound quality at lower volumes. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Volume Adjustment This setting will allow you to set the audio volume levels for each option (Media, Phone, Navigation, etc.). You can set the
volume between 0 and 38.
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Notification Sounds This setting controls the Notification chime that plays when a new notification is sent. The options are “On” and “Off”.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Favorited Pop-Up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Unfavorited Pop-Up on or off.
New Text Message Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any connected phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected phone on or off.
Navigation Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-Ups on or off.
Wireless Charger Status Pop-Ups This setting turns the Wireless Charger Status Pop-Ups on or off.
162 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip spe-
cific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
•
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profile, And Settings This setting will redirect you to the SiriusXM® settings menu within the SiriusXM® menu.
Block Explicit This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Geolocation
After pressing the Geolocation button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Geolocation This setting will turn the Geolocation on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 163
5
Software Updates
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable options for the setting are “On” and “Off”.
System Information
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.
Version Information When this feature is selected, a Version Information screen will appear, displaying information about the version of your
radio.
License Information When this feature is selected, a License Information screen will appear, displaying the licensing information of your radio.
164 MULTIMEDIA
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can
clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
•
If you want or need to perform a system reset, you can proceed by selecting the dedicated item in the Settings menu, by pushing and holding the ON/OFF button next to the
shifter, or by pressing and holding the ON/OFF button on the radio touchscreen for more than five seconds.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button
can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Restore Apps This setting will delete all of the installed apps if there is an issue with using or installing an app. The available options are
“Back” and “Next”.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
NOTE:
When Restoring Settings to Default, turn the ignition OFF and wait a few minutes before restarting. The incorrect execution
of this operation and the short period of time between the ignition being in ON/RUN and OFF could result in the privacy
settings not being maintained. In this case, repeat the operation and extend the waiting time between ignition being in
ON/RUN and OFF.
Clear Personal Data This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from the system, including Bluetooth®
devices and presets.
NOTE:
Performing this function may take several minutes to complete.
Reset Performance Values This setting will reset the performance values from your vehicle.
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone projection. The available options are “Yes”
and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
MULTIMEDIA 165
5
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED
The audio controls are located on the front of the steer-
ing wheel on the right side.
The length of the press on certain buttons can change
the function of these buttons.
Controls+/-
In Radio, Media, and Phone Modes, using these will
increase or decrease the volume.
STEERING WHEEL ROTARY
CONTROL
•
Rotate upwards in Radio Mode to select the previ-
ous radio station and downwards to select the next
radio station.
•
Rotate upwards in Media Mode to select the previ-
ous track and downwards to select the next track.
NOTE:
Press Main Screen Menu button to toggle to Radio
Mode from the Instrument Cluster display.
CONTROLS ON CENTRAL TUNNEL
A rotary control is present on the central tunnel to the
right side of the gear shifter and has different function-
ality depending on the kind of pressing and/or rotating.
Short Press
This will activate or deactivate the Mute function for
playback of audio tracks, radio stations, App streaming
and incoming calls.
Long Press
This will turn on or off the Uconnect system.
Rotate
This will increase or decrease the volume.
MY CAR
My Car is an application that provides indicators that
will help you gain familiarity with the capabilities of your
vehicle in real time.
To access My Car options, select “My Car” on the touch-
screen within the Vehicle tab.
My Car includes:
•
Overview
•
Drive Mode Explorer
Press the desired My Car item on the touchscreen to
view the content related to it.
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Overview
The main features of this page are showing when your
vehicle is due for service and the status of your tires.
Remote System Controls
1 — Scroll Radio Stations/Tracks
2 — Decrease Volume
3 — Increase Volume
Rotary Control Central Tunnel
My Car Overview
166 MULTIMEDIA
Drive Mode Explorer
This page will show content related to the Alfa DNA sys-
tem. Options on the Alfa DNA Selector are “Dynamic”,
“Natural”, and “Advance Efficiency”. Some of the follow-
ing is information that will be relayed on the
touchscreen:
•
Engine Torque
•
Gas Pedal
•
Shifting
•
Regenerative Braking
•
e-TRACTION
•
Steering
The Alfa DNA System Selector will affect the options for
Drive Mode Explorer
page 109.
PERFORMANCE PAGES
The Performance Pages is an application that provides
performance indicators that will help you gain familiar-
ity with the capabilities of your vehicle in real time.
To access Performance options, select “Performance”
from the top page headers within the Vehicle tab.
The Performance Pages includes:
•
Technical Gauges
•
Consumption History — If Equipped
•
Accessory Gauges
Viewing Content
Press the desired Performance item on the touchscreen
to view the content related to it.
The following describes each feature and its operation:
TECHNICAL GAUGES
Selecting “Technical Gauges” will display the following
items:
•
Pressure (Turbo)
•
Engine Torque Value (Torque)
NOTE:
The graphic displayed may change depending on the
different versions and engines.
CONSUMPTION HISTORY —
IF EQUIPPED
Selecting “Consumption History” will relay information
regarding the fuel consumption of the vehicle. This
information can be relayed in 60 graphic notches per
minute.
Fuel Consumption Chart
Each column shown in the graph displays the average
“Instantaneous Consumption” recorded during the last
minute of travel.
The fuel consumption graphic bar is shown on the dis-
play with “n examples” in which the last column repre-
sents the last recorded consumption values. This col-
umn will be displayed in a lighter color than the other
columns for the oldest fuel consumption.
Consumption Reset
Press the Reset icon on the display to reset the con-
sumption values. A message will appear on the screen.
Select “Yes” to reset the values.
My Car Drive Mode Explorer
Technical Gauges
Consumption History
MULTIMEDIA 167
5
ACCESSORY GAUGES
Selecting “Accessory Gauges” will relay the following
information:
•
“Oil Temp” — engine oil temperature
•
“Transm. Temp” — transmission temperature
•
“Battery Voltage” — conventional battery state of
charge
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance
from your radio. This condition may be lessened or
eliminated by repositioning the mobile phone within the
vehicle. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If
your radio performance does not satisfactorily improve
from repositioning the mobile phone, it is recom-
mended that the volume be turned down or off during
mobile phone operation when not using the Uconnect
system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
INFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure
limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in
such a manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or
further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recom-
mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scien-
tific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard air-
planes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encour-
aged to ask for authorization before turning on the wire-
less radio
page 282.
Accessory Gauges
168 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The sys-
tem automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances
vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal charac-
teristics when the ABS activates:
•
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may con-
tinue to hear for a short time after the stop)
•
Brake pedal pulsations
•
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop
The ABS is designed to function with the Original Equip-
ment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may result
in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
•
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output radio
transmitting equipment. This interference can
cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability.
Installation of such equipment should be per-
formed by qualified professionals.
•
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
•
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the igni-
tion is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is
on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits
of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL
(EBC) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic
Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System
(TCS). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
169
6
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic Steer-
ing Torque (DST), Hill Descent Control (HDC), Rain
Brake Support (RBS), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), and
Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake application and
then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can
help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply con-
tinuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence
(do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the
brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan-
ing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the
safety of others.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is
not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
and Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that pro-
vides torque at the steering wheel for certain driving
conditions in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle
instability. The torque that the steering wheel receives
is only meant to help the driver realize optimal steering
behavior in order to reach/maintain vehicle stability.
The only notification the driver receives that the feature
is active is the torque applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize
the correct course of action through small torques on
the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
the DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s sen-
sitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is
very important to realize that this feature will not steer
the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for
steering the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque
between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent over-
slip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front
axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitor-
ing the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of
the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
or other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot pre-
vent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that
involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
gerous manner which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
170 SAFETY
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to coun-
teract these conditions. Engine power may also be
reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
•
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to
the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteract-
ing the oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be
sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
•
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
(Continued)
WARNING!
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap-
propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
•
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to
the steering system, suspension, braking system,
tire type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and
unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-
mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in
this mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used
for specific reasons as noted in the following
paragraphs.
Full Off
To enter the “Full Off” mode, rotate the Alfa DNA system
selector to the “OFF” position for two seconds while the
vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After two
seconds, a chime will sound, the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” message will
display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC on again,
rotate the Alfa DNA system selector to the “OFF” posi-
tion for two seconds and the system will be set to “d”
mode.
WARNING!
•
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency
evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off”
mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only.
•
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is only intended for off-highway or off-
road use.
•
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
SAFETY 171
6
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON mode.
It should go out with the engine running. If
the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes
on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle
has been driven several miles (km) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and
corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC sys-
tem becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when Traction Control Sys-
tem (TCS) is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as pos-
sible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
•
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
•
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was turned
off previously.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) —
If Equipped
The ESS activates the hazard lights at a faster than nor-
mal speed when heavy brake pressure is applied. ESS
will only activate when the speed is above 31 mph
(50 km/h). The ESS operates independently of other
lamps, and will turn on and off automatically. This indi-
cates to others that the vehicle is stopping quickly.
NOTE:
•
A warning light will illuminate within the instrument
cluster to inform the driver that the ESS feature has
been activated.
•
When towing a trailer, ESS will also activate the rear
indicator lights of the trailer.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete
stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake
while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does
not apply the throttle before this time expires, the sys-
tem will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA
to activate:
•
The feature must be enabled.
•
The vehicle must be stopped.
•
The parking brake must be off.
•
The driver’s door must be closed.
•
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
•
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direc-
tion (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear;
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
•
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmis-
sion is in PARK or NEUTRAL.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
172 SAFETY
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet condi-
tions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake
pressure to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers
are in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is
active, there is no notification to the driver and no
driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates
when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the
driver. The Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) system will
prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin for each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS
may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduce vehicle power to provide enhanced
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake
Limited Differential (BLD) functions similarly to a limited
slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a
driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of
the spinning wheel. This will allow more vehicle torque
to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may
remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in reduced
modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located inside
the rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that
enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of
the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear and enters standby mode when the
vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width, 12 ft (3.8 m), on both sides of the vehicle. The
zone length starts at the outside mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/
bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the
vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these
areas.
NOTE:
•
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
•
The BSM system will automatically disable when a
trailer is detected. If the attached trailer is not
detected, the system detection zone DOES NOT
change. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane
is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before mak-
ing a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e.,
bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side
of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM Warning
Light remaining illuminated the entire time the
vehicle is in a forward gear. It may be necessary to
deactivate the BSM system manually to avoid mis-
detection
page 149.
Rear Detection Zones
SAFETY 173
6
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice, mud,
or other road contaminations accumulate on the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located.
The system may also detect blockage if the vehicle is
operated in areas with extremely low radar returns such
as a desert or parallel to a large elevation drop. If block-
age is detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable,
Sensor Blocked” message will display in the cluster,
both mirror lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP
alerts will not occur. This is normal operation. The sys-
tem will automatically recover and resume function
when the condition clears or when an ignition cycle
occurs. To minimize system blockage, do not block the
area of the rear fascia/bumper where the radar sen-
sors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it clear of road
contaminations.
The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object
when enabled. If the turn signal is then activated, and it
corresponds to an alert present on that side of the
vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded when
chimes are enabled. In addition to the audible alert the
radio (if on) will also be muted during the chime event
page 176.
As part of the Lane Keep Assist system, if the vehicle
begins to drift into an adjacent lane that has an active
LED indication, the LED will flash if steering torque is
provided to guide the vehicle back to the center of the
lane
page 133.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driv-
ing to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will
issue an alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with a
relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Radar Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
Warning Light Location
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
174 SAFETY
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 10 mph (16 km/h), the warning light will be
illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two
vehicles is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the warning
light may not illuminate.
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foli-
age, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may
alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adja-
cent lanes
page 282.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of
the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is
exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of
the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected,
alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side
of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R), the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume anytime
the system is enabled regardless of the chime setting.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
Opposing Traffic
RCP Detection Zones
SAFETY 175
6
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the sen-
sors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver
detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation.
Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when
using RCP. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot Alert has three selectable modes of opera-
tion that are available in the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only (Default Setting)
When operating in Lights Only mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted for the
duration of the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If
the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the
same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on)
will also be muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio volume is reduced. Turn/hazard
signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests
the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
Blocked Sensor
If the system detects degraded performance due to
contamination or foreign objects, a message will warn
you of a blocked sensor and the warning indicators in
side view mirrors will be illuminated. The warning indi-
cators will remain illuminated until blockage clearing
conditions are met. First clear the fascia/bumper area
around the sensors of the blockage. After removing the
blockage, reset the system by cycling the ignition from
ON to OFF and then back ON.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING
(FCW) WITH MITIGATION —
IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster
display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver
when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warn-
ings and limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the
potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors/cameras as well as the Electronic Brake Con-
troller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward
collision. When the system determines that a forward
collision is probable, the driver will be provided with
audible and visual warnings and may provide a brake
jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these pro-
gressive warnings, then the system will provide a lim-
ited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-
mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 39 mph (62 km/h), the system
may provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate
the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle com-
pletely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for
two seconds and then release the brakes.
176 SAFETY
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated
page 282.
NOTE:
•
The minimum speed for FCW activation is 3mph
(5 km/h).
•
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other
than vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based
on the course prediction. This is expected and is a
part of normal FCW activation and functionality.
•
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking
events within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion
of FCW will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
•
The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to
the surroundings.
•
The FCW system can become temporarily inopera-
tive due to heavy rain, sun rays, snow, ice, mud, or
other road contaminations accumulate on the front
fascia/bumper where the camera is located. If
blockage is detected, a “FCW Unavailability Due To
Camera Blindness” message will display in the clus-
ter and FCW will not function as intended. If a sec-
ond occurance happens within the same key cycle,
a FCW telltail light will illuminate only. This is normal
operation. The system will automatically recover and
resume function when the condition clears.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the respon-
sibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning
could lead to serious injury or death.
FCW Settings
The Forward Collision menu setting is located in the
Uconnect Settings
page 149.
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is “Full On,” this allows the
system to provide warning and autonomous braking in
the event of a potential frontal collision.
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents
the system from providing autonomous braking, or addi-
tional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” deactivates the sys-
tem, so no warning or autonomous braking will be avail-
able in case of a possible collision.
NOTE:
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one igni-
tion cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will
remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW Sensitivity And Operating
Status
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are pro-
grammable through the Uconnect system
page 149.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting
and the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible colli-
sion with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warn-
ings and it applies autonomous braking.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Far", the system
provides possible collision warnings on objects farther
away. This results in earlier warnings and provides the
most reaction time to avoid possible collisions.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Near", the sys-
tem provides possible collision warnings on objects
closer to the vehicle. This results in later warnings and
provides less reaction time than the "Far" and "Medium"
settings, which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
FCW Message
SAFETY 177
6
NOTE:
•
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” pre-
vents the system from providing limited active brak-
ing, or additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision, but maintains the audible and visual
warnings.
•
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the sys-
tem from providing autonomous braking, or addi-
tional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision.
•
The system will retain the last setting selected by
the driver after ignition shut down.
•
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in
the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are
far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with
the same or higher rates of speed.
•
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “FCW Limited
Functionality” or “FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
driveable under normal conditions, the active braking
may not be fully available. Once the condition that lim-
ited the system performance is no longer present, the
system will return to its full performance state. If the
problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster dis-
play reads “FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there is
an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still
driveable under normal conditions, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) —
If Equipped
PEB is a subsystem of the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) system which provides the driver with audible
warnings and visual warnings, in the instrument cluster
display. It may apply limited automatic braking when it
detects a potential frontal collision with a
pedestrian/cyclist.
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 39 mph
(62 km/h), the system may provide maximum braking
to mitigate the potential collision with a pedestrian/
cyclist. If the PEB event stops the vehicle completely,
the system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for two
seconds and then release the brakes. When the system
determines a collision with the pedestrian/cyclist in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can PEB detect
every type of potential collision with a pedestrian/
cyclist. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a
collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and
steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the sys-
tem to warn you of a possible frontal collision with the
pedestrian/cyclist.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect Settings
page 149.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian Emer-
gency Braking OFF button.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the Warning
Active Braking button.
Changing the PEB status to “Only Warning” prevents
the system from providing autonomous braking, or addi-
tional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision
with a pedestrian/cyclist.
PEB Message
178 SAFETY
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the sys-
tem, so no warning or active braking will be available in
case of a possible frontal collision with a
pedestrian/cyclist.
NOTE:
The PEB system will retain the last setting selected by
the driver after ignition shut down. The system will not
reset to the default setting when the vehicle is
restarted.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold placard
pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi-
mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature decreases,
the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should
always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This
is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
For more information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires, see
page 257.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire. The TPMS
will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as
long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until
the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold
placard pressure.
NOTE:
Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System Warning Light) illuminates, you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System Warning Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off once
the system receives the updated tire pressures. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pres-
sure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is
68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi
(165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn on
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise
to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System Warning Light will still be on. In
this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value
page 282.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
off.
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS sensor is
not designed for use on aftermarket wheels and
may contribute to a poor overall system perfor-
mance or sensor damage. Customers are encour-
aged to use Original Equipment Manufacturer
(OEM) wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature
operation.
•
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will pre-
vent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
SAFETY 179
6
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a
tire failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire
pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light.
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres-
sure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wire-
less technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sen-
sors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted
to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire pres-
sure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
•
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which will display in the instrument cluster display
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will illuminate in the instru-
ment cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a "Tire Low" message, an “Inflate to XX” mes-
sage, and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values highlighted
or in a different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those high-
lighted or in a different color in the instrument cluster
display graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value, as shown in the “Inflate to XX”
message. Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically update, the
pressure values in the graphic display in the instrument
cluster will stop being highlighted or return to their origi-
nal color, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
off.The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system
fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the instru-
ment cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" mes-
sage for a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to indicate
which sensor is not being received.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Pressure Warning
180 SAFETY
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message will no longer display, and a
pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A
system fault can occur due to any of the following:
•
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors
•
Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals
•
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings
•
Using tire chains on the vehicle
•
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors
Vehicles With Compact Spare Or Non-Matching Full
Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size
does not have a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure
below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next
ignition key cycle, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem Warning Light will remain on and a chime will
sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument
cluster will still display a different color or high-
lighted pressure value and the “Inflate to XX”
message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will dis-
play a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five
seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact
spare or non-matching full size, the TPMS will
update automatically. In addition, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off and
the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (--), as long as
no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as
when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on
your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensors. Then,
drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes-
sage and then display dashes (--) in place of the pres-
sure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The instru-
ment cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message and then display pressure values in place of
the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the "SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed as
long as no system fault exists.
SAFETY 181
6
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
FEATURES
•
Seat Belt Systems
•
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
•
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly must be secured in the appropri-
ate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in
a rear seating position
page 199.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use
the proper child restraint
page 199.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs,
the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, see
page 278 for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor
driver and could cause a collision that includes you.
This can happen far away from home or on your own
street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibil-
ity of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking
the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle
should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will sig-
nal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front
seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front pas-
senger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when
an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
182 SAFETY
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passen-
ger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder
Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the
BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts
are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to
buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is
traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin
until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoc-
cupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or
other items are placed on the outboard front passenger
seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat
(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or out-
board front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the
driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some col-
lisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
•
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
•
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
•
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle,
take it to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
(Continued)
SAFETY 183
6
WARNING!
•
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
•
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
•
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so
that your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
•
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a colli-
sion and leave you with no protection. Inspect the
seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the seat belt system. If your vehicle is
involved in a collision, or if you have questions
regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take
your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating
Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the
front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
184 SAFETY
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immedi-
ately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded web-
bing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the
top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer
twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the
top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or
downward to position the seat belt away from your
neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release
the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position
that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will pre-
fer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and
if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoul-
der belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the
upward position without pushing or squeezing the
release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is
latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
•
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
•
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is com-
fortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
•
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
•
Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center seat belt may feature a seat belt
with a mini-latch plate and buckle. The mini-latch plate
and buckle (if equipped) should remain connected at all
times. If the mini-latch plate and buckle become dis-
connected, they must be properly reconnected prior to
the rear center seat belt being used by an occupant.
Adjustable Anchorage
SAFETY 185
6
1. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over
the seat.
2. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
3. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to
go around your lap.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
5. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on
the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
6. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
7. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
8. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-
buckle, insert the regular latch plate into the center
red slot on the mini-buckle.
WARNING!
•
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not
properly connected when the seat belt is used by
an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to pro-
vide proper restraint and will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
•
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the pre-
ceding procedure to detach the mini-latch plate
and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and reat-
tach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Mini-Latch Plate Into Mini-Buckle
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
186 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable
upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its
lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you
with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender
should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for
a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
•
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
•
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the rec-
ommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove
slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the
seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a
collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner
or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further
reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The
seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint sys-
tem
page 205.
The figure provided illustrates the locking feature for
each seating position.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
SAFETY 187
6
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Auto-
matic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indi-
cates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking
Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emer-
gency) locking mode.
WARNING!
•
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
•
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
•
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or chil-
dren who are using booster seats. The locked
mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with the electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
•
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
•
Supplemental Side Air Bags
•
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
Seat Track Position Sensors
•
Occupant Classification System
188 SAFETY
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight sec-
onds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air
Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes
on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a mal-
function is detected that could affect the air bag sys-
tem. The diagnostics also record the nature of the mal-
function. While the air bag system is designed to be
maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four
to eight-second interval.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Control-
ler (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air
bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemen-
tal Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the
instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a
single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has
been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immedi-
ately
page 87.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts
for both the driver and front passenger. The front air
bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint sys-
tems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center
of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove com-
partment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
SAFETY 189
6
WARNING!
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your
arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument
panel.
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system pro-
vides output appropriate to the severity and type of col-
lision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Control-
ler (ORC), which may receive information from the front
impact sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during
an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low
energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher
energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (OCS) that is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
•
Do not put anything on or around the air bag cov-
ers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some col-
lisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional pro-
tection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear,
side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not
deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for example,
some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location
of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves
are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag
should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a
collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the infla-
tor units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated
to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper pas-
senger side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size.
The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes
to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly
deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
190 SAFETY
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a
Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is
designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as
determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of
the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
•
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is
located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The
OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM
communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC
may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant
classification. In order for the OCS to operate as
designed, it is important for the front passenger to be
seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the infla-
tion rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the
OCS estimates that:
•
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
•
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-
senger, including a child; or
•
The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-
facing child restraint; or
•
The front passenger is not properly seated or his or
her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of
time.
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Front Passenger Air
Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power
deployment
Child, including a child in
a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat*
Reduced-power deploy-
ment OR Full-power
deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power
deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power
deployment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint sys-
tem, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front
passenger seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
•
Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most prob-
able classification. The OCS estimates the seated
weight on the front passenger seat and where that
weight is located. The OCS communicates the classifi-
cation status to the ORC. The ORC uses the classifica-
tion to determine whether the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is impor-
tant for the front passenger to be seated properly and
properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passen-
gers are:
•
Sitting upright
•
Facing forward
•
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet com-
fortably on or near the floor
•
Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
SAFETY 191
6
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is work-
ing improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter-
mines the most probable classification of the occupant
that it detects. The OCS will detect the front passen-
ger’s decreased or increased seated weight, which may
result in an adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not
mean that the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front pas-
senger seat may result in a reduced-power deployment
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front pas-
senger seat may result in a full-power deployment of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
•
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or
instrument panel).
•
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
•
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
•
The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
•
Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
•
Objects are lodged between the front passenger
seat and center console.
•
Accessories that may change the seated weight on
the front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
•
Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most prob-
able classification. If an occupant in the front passen-
ger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide
an output signal to the OCS that is different from the
occupant’s properly seated weight input, for example:
Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
192 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp-
erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input. This may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing for-
ward, in the center of the seat, with your feet com-
fortably on or near the floor.
•
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger
seat. Holding an object may provide an output sig-
nal to the OCS that is different than the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
•
Placing an object on the floor under the front pas-
senger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on
the floor under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed. Do not
make any modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat,
trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US
LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
•
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
•
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the spe-
cific model being repaired. Always use the correct
seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
•
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
•
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
•
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem (SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part
except those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
•
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, seat cover or cushion may inadvertently
change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal
collision. This could result in death or serious
injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is
involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not
comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
•
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
SAFETY 193
6
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
•
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal
impact by working together with the seat belts, preten-
sioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a
label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the
seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating
SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at
a very high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other inju-
ries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in cer-
tain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Chil-
dren are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploy-
ing air bag.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
194 SAFETY
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or com-
plete ejection of vehicle occupants through side win-
dows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
•
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the deploy-
ment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the
side windows where the SABIC and its deployment
path are located should remain free from any
obstructions.
•
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into
the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain
side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air
Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based
on the severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occu-
pant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some
side collisions that do not impact the area of the pas-
senger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front
air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than
it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
•
Occupants, including children, who are up against
or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children,
should never lean on or sleep against the door,
side windows, or area where the side air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
restraint.
•
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that
is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
•
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the cen-
ter of the seat.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
•
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you prop-
erly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy
at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you
have Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed
to activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether deploy-
ment in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based
on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags and seat belt pretensioners should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the
vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing
system will deploy the side air bags and seat belt pre-
tensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or com-
plete ejection of vehicle occupants through side win-
dows in certain rollover or side impact events.
SAFETY 195
6
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components provided:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
•
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
•
Supplemental Side Air Bags
•
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
Seat Track Position Sensors
•
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,
any or all of the following may occur:
•
The air bag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the
air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are simi-
lar to friction rope burns or those you might get slid-
ing along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are not per-
manent and normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if
you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-
like particles. The particles are a normal by-product
of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used
for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have
skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these par-
ticles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immedi-
ately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
•
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
•
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication net-
work remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the provided functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
•
Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(if equipped)
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response
System
•
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of
these other functions in response to the Enhanced Acci-
dent Response System:
•
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
•
Cut off battery power to the:
○ Engine
○ Electric Motor (if equipped)
○ Electric power steering
○ Brake booster
○ Electric park brake
○ Automatic transmission gear selector
○ Horn
○ Front wiper
196 SAFETY
NOTE:
After an accident, place the ignition in the STOP (OFF)
position to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check
the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the
engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the
vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an acci-
dent, reset the system by following the procedure pro-
vided. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
After an event occurs requiring activation of the
Enhanced Accident Response System, when the system
is active, a “Service Hybrid Electric Vehicle System”
message will be displayed on the instrument cluster.
The vehicle is not drivable in this state.
In order to reset the high voltage battery and engine,
the vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer
immediately to be inspected and have the Enhanced
Accident Response System reset.
In order to immediately reset the hazard flashers, inte-
rior lights, power door locks, or the HVAC blower motor,
the ignition switch must be changed from START or
ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
After the event occurs, when the system is active, a
message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the
ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ON/
RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the
vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and
on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the
engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right
turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may
both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to
move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must fol-
low the system reset procedure.
Customer Action
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
Customer Will See
1. Place the ignition OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).
2. Place the ignition ON/RUN.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
6. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
7. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
SAFETY 197
6
Customer Action
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
Customer Will See
8. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral
State).
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light is OFF.
11. Place the ignition OFF.
12. Please the ignition ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be completed within one
minute or sequence will need to be repeated).
System is now reset and the engine may be started.
Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the
components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/
tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air
bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.
198 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in cer-
tain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
•
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
•
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during
a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buck-
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter how
strong you are. The child and others could be badly
injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for chil-
dren from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
•
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Cana-
da’s website for additional information:
https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
SAFETY 199
6
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who have not
reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, fac-
ing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have out-
grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat
belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can
be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direc-
tion than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-
facing by children who have outgrown their infant car-
rier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-
positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit
properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
200 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident,
it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear
seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all
the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touch-
ing the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then
the child still needs to use a booster seat in this
vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check
seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt
buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can
move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt con-
tacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the cen-
ter of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the
seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder
belt will not protect a child properly, which may result
in serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) XX
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
SAFETY 201
6
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback and one top tether anchorage located
behind the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions
may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchor-
ages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Label
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seat-
ing Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
202 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint)
for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and
tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system
to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed
by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating positions?
No
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH
anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If
the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a
child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front pas-
senger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child
restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes Only the outboard head restraints are removable.
SAFETY 203
6
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that
are found at the rear of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback, below the
anchorage symbols on the seatback. They
are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the gap between the seatback
and seat cushion.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the
back of the seat.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to
the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connec-
tion to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints
and some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have
a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage
and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the
anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH system. This position is not approved
for installing child seats using the LATCH attach-
ments. You must use the seat belt and tether anchor
to install a child seat in the center seating position.
(Continued)
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint.
Please see
page 204 for typical installation
instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions provided. See
page 205 to check what type of seat belt each
seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise
the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in
the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
Lower Anchorage Location
Tether Anchorage Locations
204 SAFETY
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See
page 207 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they
play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor.
Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH sys-
tem, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and
out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt inter-
feres with the child restraint installation, instead of
buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it.
Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they
should not play with them.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they
to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
•
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the
seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the web-
bing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
page 187 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table in the following sections for more
information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For
Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY 205
6
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint)
for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward-
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a
forward-facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front pas-
senger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The rear outboard head restraints can be removed if they interfere
with the installation of the child restraint.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the
belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
•
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating posi-
tion. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if
adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the web-
bing to retract back into the retractor. As the web-
bing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking
mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, con-
nect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten
the tether strap. See
page 207 for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
206 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See
page 202 for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchor-
age. You may need to move the seat forward to pro-
vide better access to the tether anchorage. If there
is no top tether anchorage for that seating position,
move the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path for the strap between the anchor and the child
seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear
head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where
possible, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the two posts. If not possible,
lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
•
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your
pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possi-
bly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking
or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped)
in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts.
Rear Seat Tether Anchors
SAFETY 207
6
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-
not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collec-
tion & Privacy” in your Uconnect Radio Instruction
Manual or
page 96.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the pos-
sible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
MAKE INSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding the seat belt or retractor condi-
tions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first placed in the
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon
as possible. After the bulb check, this light will illumi-
nate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag
System has been detected. It will stay on until the fault
is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately
page 182.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should be
able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See
an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inop-
erable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the opera-
tion of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use
a floor mat that is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair
safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control.
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
•
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a
regular basis.
•
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing
any other floor mat. NEVER install or
stack an additional floor mat on top of
an existing floor mat.
•
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved
floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of
your vehicle.
•
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any
pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the
floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
•
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
(Continued)
208 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a
loss of vehicle control.
•
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interfer-
ence with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
•
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the
floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure
to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
•
It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always
check your floor mat has been properly installed
and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat
fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU
SHOULD MAKE OUTSIDE THE
VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other
objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the
tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the lug nut/bolt torque for
tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper
cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights
and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check
turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instru-
ment panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
•
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in con-
fined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
•
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
•
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the
vehicle is damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect
the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compart-
ment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions provided to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal con-
ditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
SAFETY 209
6
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on the
switch bank just below the radio screen.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with an Emergency Stop
Signal (ESS)
page 172.
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flash-
ers. When the button is activated, all directional turn
signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of
an emergency. Push the button a second time to turn
off the Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when
your vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard
warning for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance,
the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate
even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may
wear down your battery.
SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
If equipped, the overhead console contains an SOS
button.
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber
page 282.
•
The SOS button will only function if you are con-
nected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network, which comes as a built in function. Other
services will only be operable if your Alfa Connected
services is active and you are connected to an oper-
able LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
SOS Button Location
210
SOS Call
1. Press or hold the SOS Call button on the overhead
console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there
will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call sys-
tem initiates a call to an SOS operator. To cancel the
SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button on
the overhead console or press the cancellation but-
ton on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS
Call will turn off the green LED light on the overhead
console.
2. The LED light located next to the SOS button on the
overhead console will turn green once a connection
to a SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
○
Indication that the occupant placed an SOS Call
○
The vehicle brand
○
The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional assistance is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
NOTE:
○
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
○
Once a connection is made between the vehi-
cle’s SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the
SOS operator may be able to open a voice con-
nection with the vehicle to determine if addi-
tional assistance is needed. Once the SOS opera-
tor opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s
SOS Call system, the operator should be able to
speak with you or other vehicle occupants and
hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehi-
cle’s SOS Call system will attempt to remain con-
nected with the SOS operator until the SOS
operator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropri-
ate emergency responders and provide them with
important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
•
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe
location.
•
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could pre-
vent operable network and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and GPS sig-
nal reception is required for the SOS Call system to
function properly.
•
The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehi-
cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR
AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE ALFA CONNECT FEA-
TURES, APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS,
WILL NOT OPERATE.
•
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 211
7
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may
not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
•
The light located next to the SOS button will continu-
ously illuminate red.
•
The Device Screen will display the following mes-
sage “Vehicle Device Requires Service. Please Con-
tact An Authorized Dealer.”
•
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an autho-
rized dealer.”
WARNING!
•
Ignoring the overhead console light could mean
you will not have SOS Call services. If the overhead
console light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
•
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi-
nated, have an authorized dealer service the Occu-
pant Restraint Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
•
The ignition is in the OFF position
•
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
•
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
•
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash
•
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or
obstructed
•
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
•
Operator error by the SOS operator
•
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
•
Weather
•
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber
page 282.
•
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
from placing an emergency call. An operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call system to
function properly.
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that
your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your pro-
vided radio supplement for complete information.
ASSIST Call
The vehicle is equipped with an on-board assist, which
is located within the Uconnect system. The ASSIST fea-
ture is used to automatically connect you to any one of
the following support centers:
•
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need
a tow, just push the ASSIST button to connect to
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will
know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside assistance.
•
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
•
Alfa Connect Customer Care - Total support for
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
For further information, refer to the vehicles radio
supplement.
212 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING —
IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
•
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
•
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid
ice or slippery areas.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Place the ignition in the OFF position.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if the
driver’s front wheel is being changed, block the pas-
senger’s rear wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK AND TOOLS LOCATION/SPARE
TIRE STOWAGE — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, the jack, tools and spare tire are located
under the load floor in the rear cargo compartment.
Scan me
Wheel Blocked Example
Jack, Tools And Spare Tire Location
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 213
7
To access the jack, tools and spare tire proceed as
follows:
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Locate and lift up on the load floor handle.
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire by turn-
ing it counterclockwise.
4. Pull upward to remove the jack and tools tray to gain
access to the spare tire.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
•
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the trans-
mission in PARK.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely care-
ful of motor traffic.
•
To ensure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Load Floor Handle
Spare Tire
Spare Tire Fastener
Jack And Tools
1—TowEye
2 — Wheel Bolt Wrench
3 — Jack
4 — Wheel Chock
5 — Fuel Funnel
6 — Unlocking Tool (If Equipped)
7 — Screwdriver (If Equipped)
214 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
1. Remove the jack, wheel bolt wrench and spare tire.
2. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt
wrench to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts
on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts
counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on
the ground.
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jack locations are
critical. See the following images for proper jacking
locations.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on loca-
tions other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
3. Jack lifting points can be identified by an opening
under an access panel that exposes the steel lifting
flange. Before positioning the jack, remove the
access panel with the provided screwdriver or simi-
lar tool. Place the jack underneath the lifting area
that is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw
clockwise to securely engage the jack saddle to the
lifting area of the sill flange, centering the jack
saddle within the notch of the sill trim.
Jack Warning Label
Loosening The Wheel Bolts
Jacking Locations
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 215
7
4. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
6. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
NOTE:
○
For vehicles equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
○
For additional warnings, cautions, and informa-
tion about the spare tire, its use, and operation
page 257.
7. Install and lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
8. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
9. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice
page 273. If in doubt about the correct tight-
ness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
an authorized dealer or at a service station.
10. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
blocks. Stow the wheel bolt wrench, jack assembly
and wheel blocks in the provided storage. Secure
the assembly using the means provided. Release
the parking brake before driving the vehicle.
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
Mounting Spare Tire
216 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
11. After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel bolt
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all
wheel bolts are properly seated against the wheel.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire
in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
TIRE INFLATOR KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
DESCRIPTION
If a tire is punctured, you can make an emergency
repair using the Tire Inflator Kit located beneath the
load floor in the rear cargo area.
The Tire Inflator Kit includes:
•
Power Cord.
•
Sealant cartridge containing the sealing fluid.
•
Filler tube.
•
Adhesive label with the writing "Max. 50 mph
(80 km/h)”, to be attached in a position easily vis-
ible to the driver (e.g. on the dashboard) after repair-
ing the tire.
•
Air compressor, complete with pressure gauge and
connectors.
•
A pair of protective gloves (if equipped).
•
Adapters for inflating different elements.
INFLATION PROCEDURE
WARNING!
•
The information required by current legislation is
shown on the kit cartridge label. Read the car-
tridge label before use, avoid improper use.
•
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
•
Do not remove foreign bodies from the tire.
•
Do not leave the compressor running for more
than 20 minutes, this may cause overheating.
(Continued)
Damaged Tire Stowage
Scan me
Tire Inflator Kit Storage
Tire Inflator Kit Components
1 — Adhesive Label
2 — Sealant Cartridge
3 — Filler Tube
4—PowerCord
5 — Air Compressor
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 217
7
WARNING!
•
Do not use the Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
○ If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
○ If the tire has any sidewall damage.
○ If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
○
If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire.
○ If the wheel has any damage.
○ If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
•
Keep the Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat sources.
•
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the
place provided. Failure to follow these warnings
can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
•
Take care not to allow the contents of the Tire Ser-
vice Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or cloth-
ing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-
ately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as pos-
sible, if there is any contact with clothing.
•
Tire Service Kit sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
sician immediately. Keep the Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
NOTE:
Always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Con-
tact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for addi-
tional details.
To use your Tire Inflator Kit, proceed as follows:
1. Stop the vehicle in a position where you can repair
the tire safely. Activate the Hazard Warning Flashers
to make other drivers aware of your presence.
2. If equipped, use all available safety equipment
required by law.
3. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Tire Inflator Kit hoses to
reach the valve stem and keep the tire repair kit flat
on the ground.
4. Place the gear selector to PARK (P).
5. Apply the Electric Park Brake and cycle the engine
OFF.
6. Insert the sealant cartridge containing the sealing
fluid in the proper compressor holder, pushing down
hard. Unscrew the tire valve cap, take out the filler
tube and tighten the fitting on the tire valve.
7. Make sure the compressor is switched off.
8. Insert the plug into the vehicle’s center console
power outlet, then start the engine.
9. Switch the compressor on.
Attaching Filler Tube To Deflated Tire
2 — Sealant Cartridge
3 — Filler Tube
Power Outlet Location
218 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
10. Inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
placard, located on the driver’s side B-pillar or the
rear edge of the driver’s side door
page 260.
In order to obtain a more precise reading, check
the pressure value on pressure gauge with the
compressor off.
11. If the pressure is not at least 26.1 psi (1.8 bar)
after 15 minutes, disengage the compressor from
the valve and power outlet. Then, move the vehicle
forwards approximately 33 ft (10 m) in order to
distribute the sealant inside the tire evenly, and
then repeat the inflation operation.
12. If you still cannot obtain a pressure of at least
26 psi (1.8 bar) within 15 minutes of turning the
compressor on, do not drive the vehicle, and con-
tact an authorized dealer.
13. Drive the vehicle for about 5 miles (8 km), stop,
apply the Electric Park Brake, and recheck the tire
pressure.
14. If the pressure is less than 26 psi (1.8 bar), DO
NOT drive the vehicle, and see an authorized
dealer.
15. If a pressure value of at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) is
detected, restore the correct pressure (with engine
running and Electric Park Brake applied), and drive
immediately with great care to an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using the Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Fail-
ure to follow this warning can result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and oth-
ers around you. Have the tire checked as soon as
possible at an authorized dealer.
16. Apply the adhesive label from the sealant bottle
where it can be easily seen by the driver as a
reminder that the tire has been treated with a Tire
Inflator Kit, as well as not to exceed the speed
restriction for the treated tire.
WARNING!
Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker to the
padded area on the steering wheel. Adhering the
speed restriction sticker to the padded area on the
steering wheel is dangerous because the air bag may
not operate (deploy) normally resulting in serious
injury. In addition, do not adhere the sticker to areas
where warning lights or the speedometer cannot be
viewed.
CHECKING AND RESTORING TIRE
PRESSURE
The compressor can also be used to check and, if nec-
essary, restore the tire pressure.
Proceed as follows:
1. Plug the power cord in the vehicle’s power outlet.
2. Release the quick connector and connect it directly
to the valve of the tire to be inflated.
3. Push the air release button.
Air Compressor
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Power Switch
Air Compressor Components
6 — Air Release Button
7 — Quick Connector
8—PowerCord
9 — Release Button
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 219
7
SEALANT CARTRIDGE
REPLACEMENT
The sealant liquid is subject to expiration and must be
replaced periodically.
•
Use only original cartridges, which can be pur-
chased at an authorized dealer.
•
Show the cartridge and label to the staff who will
have to handle the tire treated with the kit.
•
The sealant is effective with external temperatures
of between -40°F (-40°C) and 122°F (50°C). The
sealant has an expiration date.
To replace the sealant cartridge, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the sealant cartridge by pushing the
release button located on the side of the
compressor.
2. Insert the new sealant cartridge by pushing down-
ward firmly.
JUMP STARTING — GAS MODELS
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improp-
erly, so please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
NOTE:
A battery replacement or disruption of power may
cause loss of Steering Angle Calibration and an error
message to occur
page 84. Performing a Lock-to-
Lock Steering Angle Calibration may correct this
condition.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START —
GAS MODELS
The battery in your vehicle is located in the rear of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight
assembly.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic trans-
mission into PARK (P) and turn the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cover over
the positive (+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set
the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Sealant Cartridge Replacement
2 — Sealant Cartridge
9 — Release Button
Positive (+) Battery Post
220 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
•
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving
fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadver-
tent electrical contact. You could be seriously
injured.
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE —
GAS MODELS
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground. A “ground” is an
exposed metallic/unpainted part of the engine,
frame or chassis, such as an accessory bracket or
large bolt. The ground must be away from the bat-
tery and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode and could
result in personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle for a few minutes, and
then start the engine in the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the disconnecting
procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery, and reinstall the
protective cover.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle, you should have the battery and charging sys-
tem inspected at an authorized dealer.
For the Plug-in Hybrid version: If both the traditional
battery and the high-voltage battery are flat, charge the
traditional battery first, in order to start the system and
allow the heat engine to start in order to move the car.
We suggest then, to also charge the high-voltage
battery.
Jump Starting Procedure
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 221
7
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
JUMP STARTING — HYBRID MODELS
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improp-
erly, so please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
The vehicle requires its 12 Volt battery power to turn-on
the vehicle's high voltage battery. The high voltage bat-
tery is used to charge the 12 Volt battery, provide elec-
tric vehicle operation, and to start the vehicle's gas
engine. If the 12 Volt battery has been discharged, the
vehicle can be jump started using a set of jumper
cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a
portable battery booster pack.
If the vehicle's high voltage battery has also been dis-
charged, it will need to be recharged to a minimum
operating State Of Charge (SOC) before the vehicle can
be started:
•
If the vehicle can be connected to a Level 1 or Level
2 charger where it is currently parked, the vehicle
will still require a jump start to allow the vehicle to
begin the battery charging process. Once the vehicle
charging has begun (indicated by the charge status
indicator on top of the vehicle's instrument panel),
the jumper cables can be removed from the vehicle
jump posts.
•
If the vehicle cannot be connected to a Level 1 or
Level 2 charger where it is currently parked, the
vehicle can be moved by connecting 12 Volt power
to the vehicle's jump posts and then shifting the
transmission from PARK (P) into NEUTRAL (N).
Power provided by the jumper cables will also allow
the Electric Park Brake to be released. Carefully
move the vehicle to a Level 1 or Level 2 charge loca-
tion. While the vehicle is being moved, the external
12 Volt power must remain connected to the vehicle
jump posts.
NOTE:
Be careful when moving the vehicle - ensure that con-
trol of the vehicle is maintained. Also, ensure that
vehicle is secured to prevent unintentional movement
during and after moving the vehicle. If the external
12 Volt power becomes disconnected from the vehicle
jump posts or there is an interruption of the 12 Volt
power while moving the vehicle, the vehicle's transmis-
sion may engage PARK. Do not allow the jumper cables
to come in contact with each other or to the vehicle,
this will result in a short.
When the vehicle is at the charging location, shift the
transmission back to PARK, apply the Electric Park
Brake, and start the high voltage battery charging. Once
the vehicle has been secured against unintentional
movement and high voltage battery charging has been
initiated, the jumper cables can be removed from the
vehicle jump posts.
NOTE:
A battery replacement or disruption of power may
cause loss of Steering Angle Calibration and an error
message to occur
page 84. Performing a Lock-to-
Lock Steering Angle Calibration may correct this
condition.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
222 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START —
HYBRID MODELS
The battery in your vehicle is located in the rear of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight
assembly.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic trans-
mission into PARK (P) and turn the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cover over
the positive (+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set
the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
•
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving
fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadver-
tent electrical contact. You could be seriously
injured.
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE —
HYBRID MODELS
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground. A “ground” is an
exposed metallic/unpainted part of the engine,
frame or chassis, such as an accessory bracket or
large bolt. The ground must be away from the bat-
tery and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode and could
result in personal injury.
Positive (+) Battery Post
Jump Starting Procedure
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 223
7
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle for a few minutes, and
then cycle the ignition to ON/RUN in the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
6. After a couple minutes (depending on the level of
12 Volt battery discharge), attempt to start the
vehicle. Once the engine is started, follow the dis-
connecting procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery, and reinstall the
protective cover.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle, you should have the battery and charging sys-
tem inspected at an authorized dealer.
For the Plug-in Hybrid version: If both the traditional
battery and the high-voltage battery are flat, charge the
traditional battery first, in order to start the system and
allow the heat engine to start in order to move the car.
We suggest then, to also charge the high-voltage
battery.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for a
capless fuel system. The refueling funnel is located
under the load floor in the rear cargo area. If refueling
is necessary, while using an approved gas can, insert
the refueling funnel into the filler neck opening. Take
care to open both flapper doors with the funnel to avoid
spills.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the outside
center of the fuel door to break the ice buildup. Do not
pry on the door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel
is provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the
fuel nozzle.
Fuel Funnel
Inserting Funnel
224 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors
open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light to turn on.
•
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating:
•
Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
•
Strong smell of coolant
•
White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
•
Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do
not open the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
If the temperature gauge is moving towards or close to
the HOT (H) position, you can reduce the potential for
overheating by taking the appropriate action.
•
On highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmis-
sion in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine
idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the
brakes.
•
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•
You can also turn the temperature control to maxi-
mum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower
control to high. This allows the heater core to act as
a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing
heat from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air con-
ditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”
and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs, and the gear selector cannot
be moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the gear
selector:
1. First turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Grab the boot material of the gear selector and pull
up to carefully separate the gear selector bezel and
boot assembly from the center console.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 225
7
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
5. Locate the gear selector override access (at the
right rear corner of the gear selector assembly).
Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, push and
hold the override release lever down.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N) position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around
the front wheels. Push and hold the button on the gear
selector. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE (D)
and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake
pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure
that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning
the wheels or racing the engine.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage,
or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for lon-
ger than 30 seconds continuously without stopping
when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
NOTE:
Using the DNA selector, rotate to the OFF position to
place the system in “Full Off” mode, before rocking the
vehicle
page 171. Once the vehicle has been freed,
deactivate the “Full Off” mode by rotating the DNA
selector back to the OFF position.
CAUTION!
•
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE gear and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain dam-
age may result.
•
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
Gear Selector Bezel
Gear Selector Override Access Location
226 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
TOWING CONDITION WHEELS OFF THE GROUND ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
REAR NOT ALLOWED
FRONT NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains
is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing devices
to main structural members of the vehicle, not to
fascia/bumper or associated brackets. State and local
laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
•
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle to avoid inadver-
tent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park
Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the cus-
tomer programmable features in the Uconnect
Settings.
•
Vehicles with a discharged battery, or total electrical
failure when the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is
engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the
rear wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle
onto a flatbed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters,
etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN mode.
Note that the Safehold feature will engage the Electric
Park Brake whenever the driver's door is opened (if the
battery is connected, ignition is ON, transmission is not
in PARK, and brake pedal is released). If you are towing
this vehicle with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you
must manually disable the Electric Park Brake each
time the driver's door is opened by pressing the brake
pedal and then releasing the EPB.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, instructions on
shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK so that
the vehicle can be moved
page 225.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
•
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
•
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
•
Do not use a fascia/bumper mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The fascia/bumper face
bar will be damaged.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 227
7
WITHOUT THE KEY FOB
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the OFF mode. The only approved
method of towing without the key fob is with a flatbed
truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
CAUTION!
•
Towing this vehicle using any other method can
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage.
•
Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
TOW EYE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with tow eyes that can be
used to move a disabled vehicle. When using tow eyes,
see the following precautions.
Tow Eye Usage Precautions
CAUTION!
•
The tow eye must only be used for roadside emer-
gencies. Use with an appropriate device in accor-
dance with highway code (a rigid bar or rope) to
maneuver the vehicle in preparation for transport
via a tow truck.
•
The tow eye must not be used to move the vehicle
off the road or where there are obstacles.
•
Do not use the tow eyes for tow truck hookup or
highway towing.
•
Do not use the tow eye to free a stuck vehicle
page 226.
•
Damage to your vehicle may occur if these guide-
lines are not followed.
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow eyes.
•
Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains may
break, causing serious injury or death.
•
Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow straps
may break or become disengaged, causing serious
injury or death.
•
Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may cause
components to break resulting in serious injury or
death.
Tow Eye
Tow Eye Warning Label
228 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tow Eye Installation
The rear tow eye receptacle is located behind an access
door on the passenger’s side of the rear
fascia/bumper.
To install the tow eye, open the access door using a
small screwdriver or similar tool. Thread the tow eye
into the receptacle, making sure it is fully tightened.
The tow eye must be securely seated to the attaching
bracket through the rear fascia/bumper. If the tow eye
is not securely seated to the attaching bracket, the
vehicle should not be moved.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes
effect in the event of an impact.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data
that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s sys-
tems performed under certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle
page 199.
Rear Tow Eye Access Door
Rear Tow Eye Installed
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 229
7
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate in the instrument clus-
ter. This means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,
trailer towing, and extremely hot or cold ambient tem-
peratures will influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil
Change Required” message is displayed. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If
a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than an authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under Instrument Clus-
ter Display
page 80.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), one year or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first.
The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally
only a concern for fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
•
Check engine oil level.
•
Check windshield washer fluid level.
•
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for
unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first
sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil
indicator system turns on.
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and
brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill as needed.
•
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace the engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
230
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
OrYears:23456789101112131415
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. X XXXXXX
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.
XXXXXXX
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X XXXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the PTU fluid level. X X X
Inspect the rear differential fluid level. X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pulley, and replace if
necessary.
X
Replace engine air cleaner filter. XXXXX
Replace brake fluid every two years, regardless of mileage. X XXXXXX
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs — 2.0L.
* XX
Replace spark plugs — 1.3L.
* XXX
Flush and replace the engine, power electronics, and battery coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
* The spark plug change interval is mileage based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about
your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 231
8
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1.3L PHEV ENGINE
1 — Oil Fill Cap/Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Battery/Power Electronics Coolant Reservoir Cap
2 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter (Located Under Engine Cover)
3 — Battery 7 — Coolant Pressure Bottle Cap
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
232 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2.0L ENGINE
1 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Battery 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 233
8
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time
to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after
a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
•
Crosshatched zone.
•
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
•
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end
of the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
•
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the low
end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the engine oil will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Engine Oil Cap/Dipstick Installation — PHEV
Install the oil cap/dipstick aligning arrow on the cap
with arrow on the engine cover.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual washer fluid.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel, and wipe clean
the wiper blades; this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets
or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free bat-
tery. You will never have to add water, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
NOTE:
A battery replacement or disruption of power may
cause loss of Steering Angle Calibration and an error
message to occur
page 84. Performing a Lock-to-
Lock Steering Angle Calibration may correct this
condition.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immedi-
ately with large amounts of water.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
Oil Cap
1 — Oil Cap/Dipstick Arrow
2 — Engine Cover Arrow
234 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts
and connections however, the pressures generated
by high pressure washers are such that complete
protection against water ingress cannot be
guaranteed.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
may void your warranty and could result in civil penal-
ties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
For engine oil selection page 277.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by
the API. The manufacturer only recommends API trade-
mark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies
0W-40 and 5W-40 engine oil.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
bers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection
dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered prod-
uct and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil
and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to
the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 235
8
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified filters
should be used. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is unavail-
able, only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-
36 Filter Performance Requirments.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals page 230.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is neces-
sary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before starting
the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies considerably.
Only high quality Mopar® certified filters should be
used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — Gas
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as
shown in the Maintenance Plan in this section.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air cleaner
filter cover using a suitable tool.
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the
engine air cleaner filter by rotating at the hinge and
pulling the cover away from the engine.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the hous-
ing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or
debris is present before replacing the engine air
cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter inspec-
tion surface facing downward.
2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover fasteners
using a suitable tool.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter cover
lid screws or damage may result.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — PHEV
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as
shown in the Maintenance Plan in this section.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Remove the engine cover.
2. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air cleaner
filter cover using a suitable tool.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Fasteners
236 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Lift and remove the engine air cleaner filter cover to
access the engine air cleaner filter.
4. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the hous-
ing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or
debris is present before replacing the engine air
cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter inspec-
tion surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover.
3. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover fasteners
using a suitable tool.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter cover
lid screws or damage may result.
4. Reinstall the engine cover.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This service
should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a
performance test. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located in your owner’s
information kit, for further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recover y And Recycling
R-1234yf
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance
with a low global-warming potential. It is recommended
that air conditioning service be performed by an autho-
rized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system com-
pressor oil, and refrigerants. Refer to underhood label
for oil type.
Cabin Air Filter
See an authorized dealer for service.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Fasteners
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 237
8
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease,
such as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and wear.
Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts con-
cerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always
use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt
or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are
not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid
damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade out of con-
tact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gaso-
line, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. If chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots are present, clean the
wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Service Position Strategy
The Service Position Strategy places the wiper blades in
a position that allows them to be easily changed.
To enable the Service Position Strategy, the wipers
must be in the park position before placing the ignition
in the OFF position. The Service Position Strategy must
be activated within two minutes after the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. To correctly activate the Ser-
vice Position command, move the wiper lever upward
for at least half a second. At every valid activation of the
Service Position command, the wiper blades are acti-
vated for 250 ms. The Service Position command can
be repeated several times to bring the blades into the
desired position, up to a maximum of three times. After
three subsequent activations the strategy is disabled.
Function Deactivation And Reset:
•
The ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
•
There are three subsequent activations.
•
The two minute timer has expired after turning the
ignition OFF.
NOTE:
When turning the ignition ON, the blades go into the
park position.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass
may be damaged.
1.
Place the wiper blades in the service position strategy.
2. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the windshield.
3. Push the release button on the arm of the wiper
blade.
4. Push the wiper blade up and remove it.
5. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the wiper
blade until it snaps into place.
Wiper Arm And Blade
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Button
3 — Wiper Arm
238 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1.
Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass.
2. Remove the nut and remove the wiper arm from the
vehicle.
3. Install a new wiper arm, securely tighten the nut and
put the cap back in place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust sys-
tem; or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil changes.
Replace as required.
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain car-
bon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odor-
less. Breathing it can make you unconscious and
can eventually poison you
page 207.
•
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn, such materials might
be grass or leaves, and those items that come into
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or
operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust
system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
•
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy
the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions
control device and may seriously reduce engine
performance and cause serious damage to the
engine.
•
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Con-
tinued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Arm Nut
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 239
8
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is
important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Ser-
vice, including a tune-up to manufacturer specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
•
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission
is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing
the vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as during diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
•
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised.
The fan starts automatically and may start at any
time, whether the engine is running or not.
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to
the OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled
and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON
mode.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh engine coolant. Check the front of the
A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a gar-
den hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the proper mainte-
nance intervals
page 230.
Electric/Battery Coolant System — PHEV
(If Equipped)
These coolant systems must be serviced by an autho-
rized dealer. If the coolant level is below what is speci-
fied on the reservoir, contact an authorized dealer for
service.
These systems require the use of high purity water,
such as deionized, or distilled water, when mixing the
water and coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of
lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion
protection in the cooling systems. If the coolant level of
the battery coolant system is low, the Hybrid Electric
Vehicle System Service Light will be illuminated on the
instrument cluster.
240 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Selection Of Coolant
For further information page 277.
NOTE:
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant is
different and should not be mixed with Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT
engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
tors or anti-rust products, as they may not be com-
patible with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with pro-
pylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of propyl-
ene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
•
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any cool-
ant is needed to be added to the system please con-
tact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important to use the same engine coolant (OAT cool-
ant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using OAT
engine coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032. When add-
ing engine coolant:
•
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water.
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated.
Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
•
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the
vehicle is operated.
•
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any cool-
ant is needed to be added to the system, please
contact an authorized dealer.
•
Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended
and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT
and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
an authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing
surfaces.
WARNING!
•
Do not open a hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald-
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 241
8
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet,
seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any
ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be
between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
bottle. Do not overfill.
Engine Coolant Level — 2.0L
WARNING!
•
Do not open a hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald-
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine
coolant should be within the OK range between the
ADD and FULL range on the dipstick.
1. Remove the cap with level dipstick from the engine
coolant bottle.
2. Clean off the coolant from the dipstick.
3. Rest the cap on the opening of the coolant bottle
without tightening the cap.
4. Remove the cap with dipstick and check the coolant
level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there
is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant freeze point or
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain
the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows
no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may
be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
•
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant additions are required,
the cooling system should be pressure tested for
leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a mini-
mum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle over-
flow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs
may result in unsatisfactory engine cooling perfor-
mance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 230.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high
brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and pos-
sible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services or immediately if
the Brake Warning Light is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring
the fluid level up to the requirements described on the
brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid
level should be checked when pads are replaced. How-
ever, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a
checkup may be needed.
Use only the manufacturer recommended brake fluid
page 277.
WARNING!
•
Use only the manufacturer recommended brake
fluid
page 277. Using the wrong type of brake
fluid can severely damage your brake system
and/or impair its performance. The proper type of
brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in an open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
•
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake fail-
ure. This could result in a collision.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
It is strongly recommended against using any special
additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the trans-
mission. The only exception to this policy is the use of
special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks in 6-speed trans-
missions. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore
the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer
can check your transmission fluid level using special
service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
severe transmission damage.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 243
8
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life.
Use only the manufacturer specified transmission fluid
page 277. It is important to maintain the transmis-
sion fluid at the correct level using the recommended
fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmis-
sion; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. For fluid specifications
page 277.
FUSES
General Information
WARNING!
•
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating
as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with
another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a
blown fuse with metal wires or any other material.
Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may
result in serious personal injury, fire and/or prop-
erty damage.
•
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the igni-
tion is off and that all the other services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
•
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
•
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result
in vehicle battery discharge.
Power Distribution Center/Fuses And
Relays
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays. Fuse cavity locations are printed on the inside of
the power distribution center cover.
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it
is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element
(blown fuse)
244 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Underhood Power Distribution Location
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
8
Underhood Power Distribution Location
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The fuse box screw and cover must be removed to gain
access to the fuses.
For fuse box access, proceed as follows:
1. Turn the locking screw counterclockwise.
2. Slowly release the screw.
3. Remove the fuse box cover by sliding it upward.
4. Reverse the procedure to reinstall.
Fuse Box Cover And Locking Screw Removal
1 — Fuse Cover
2 — Locking Screw
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
8
Main Fuse Block — Gasoline Engine
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – 70 Amp Tan – BCM1
F02 – 70 Amp Tan – BCM2 / RDU
F03 20 Amp Blue – – BCM3
F04 40 Amp Green – – BCM Valves
F05 – 40 Amp Orange – PTC 1
F06 – 20 Amp Yellow – Front Wiper Motor
F07 – 20 Amp Yellow – DTCM
F08 30 Amp Pink – – Power Supply F24 - F87 - Fxx
F09 – – 7.5 Amp Brown ECM T09
F10 – – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F11 – – 5 Amp Tan Engine Secondary Loads
F14 – – 7.5 Amp Brown LTR
F15 – 40 Amp Orange – BSM Pump
F16 – – 10 Amp Red ECM / TCM / AGSM
F17 – – 10 Amp Red ECM
F18 – – – Spare
F19 – – 7.5 Amp Brown A/C Compressor
F20 – – 15 Amp Blue RR Cargo Power Outlet
F21 – – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
F22 – – 15 Amp Blue ECM
F23 – – 5 Amp Tan USB / Aux Outlet
F24 – – 10 Amp Red DTCM
F30 – – 5 Amp Tan AWD DTCM
F81 – 30 Amp Green – Brake Booster Vacuum Pump
F82 – – – Spare
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F83 40 Amp Green – – HVAC Fan
F84 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Rad Fan Enable
F87 – – 5 Amp Tan AGSM
F88 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Mirrors & Washer Nozzle
F89 30 Amp Pink – – Rear Window Defrost
F90 – – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor
Main Fuse Block — Hybrid
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – 70 Amp Tan – BCM1
F02 – 70 Amp Tan – BCM2 / RDU
F03 20 Amp Blue – – BMC3
F04 40 Amp Green – – BCM Valves
F05 – 40 Amp Orange – PTC 1
F06 – 20 Amp Yellow – Front Wiper Motor
F07 – 50 Amp Red – AUX 1 RDU
F08 30 Amp Pink – – Power Supply F24 - F87 - Fxx
F09 – – 7.5 Amp Brown ECM T09
F10 – – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F11 – – 5 Amp Tan Engine Secondary Loads
F14 – – – Spare
F15 – 70 Amp Tan – BSM Pump
F16 – – 10 Amp Red ECM / TCM / AGSM
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F17 – – 10 Amp Red GPF - HV Fuel lid - HV Fuel Tank
Isolation Valve
F19 – – 7.5 Amp Brown A/C Compressor
F20 – – 15 Amp Blue RR Cargo Power Outlet
F21 – – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
F22 – – 20 Amp Yellow Engine Primary Loads
F23 – – 5 Amp Tan AGS/ USB / Aux Outlet
F24 – – 10 Amp Red TCM
F30 – – – Spare
F81 – 40 Amp Orange – AUX 2 RDU
F82 40 Amp Green – – External Oil Pump (AT)
F83 40 Amp Green – – HVAC Fan
F84 – – – Spare
F87 – – 5 Amp Tan AGSM
F88 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Mirrors & Washer Nozzle
F89 30 Amp Pink – – Rear Window Defrost
F90 – – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor
Fxx – – 25 Amp Clear EPT_PIM_Feed_2
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Supplemental Fuse Box Location
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
8
Relays — Gasoline Engine
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
T02 – – Not Used
T03 – 30 Amp Horn
T05 – 30 Amp A/C Compressor
T06 – 30 Amp Rad Fan Enable
T08 – 30 Amp HVAC Fan
T10 – – Not Used
T14 – 30 Amp RR Cargo Power Outlet
T19 – – Not Used
T20 – 30 Amp Starter Relay R1
T31 – 30 Amp Fuel Pump
T89 – – Not Used
T90 – 30 Amp Brake Booster Vacuum Pump
Relays — Hybrid
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
T02 – – Not Used
T03 – 30 Amp Horn
T05 – 30 Amp A/C Compressor
T06 – 30 Amp Rad Fan Enable
T07 50 Amp – Aux.1
T08 – 30 Amp HVAC Fan
T09 – 30 Amp Engine Main Relay
T10 – – Not Used
T14 – 30 Amp Rear Cargo Power Outlet
T17 – 30 Amp Rear Window Defrost/Heated Mirrors
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
T19 – 30 Amp External Oil Pump
T20 – 30 Amp Starter Relay R1
T31 – 30 Amp Fuel Pump
T89 – – Not Used
T90 – 30 Amp Brake Booster Vacuum Pump
Supplemental Fuse Box — Hybrid
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F01 5 Amp Tan Electric Air Heater (EAH)
F02 7.5 Amp Brown Electric Air Compressor (EAC)
F03 5 Amp Tan Integrated Dual Charge Module (IDCM)
F04 5 Amp Tan Charge Port Indicator Module (CPIM)
F05 15 Amp Blue Power Electronic Coolant Pump 2 (PECP2)
F06 15 Amp Blue Power Electronic Coolant Pump (PECP)
F07 5 Amp Tan Aux Heater Pump (AHP)
F08 5 Amp Tan PIM Feed 1
F09 10 Amp Red BPCM Feed 1
F10 5 Amp Tan PIM Feed 3
F11 10 Amp Red BPCM Feed 2
F12 5 Amp Tan Electronic Pedestrian Protection Module (EPPM)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 253
8
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located under the driver’s side
lower instrument panel.
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F31 7.5 Amp Brown HVAC relay coil / Power Outlet / Seats Movement Relay Coil
F33 20 Amp Yellow Front Passenger Window Lifter
F34 20 Amp Yellow Front Driver Window Lifter
F36 15 Amp Blue
HVAC / VTA / External Mirror /Ceiling Light / CVPM / Radio Mod / USB / AUX/ DCSD /
Electric Steering Lock
F37 10 Amp Red Brake Switch / DASM / IPC
F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Door Lock / Doors Unlock / Decklid / Liftgate
F42 7.5 Amp Brown BSM / EPS
F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-Directional Washer Pump
F47 20 Amp Yellow Rear Left Window Lifter
F48 20 Amp Yellow Rear Right Window Lifter
F49 7.5 Amp Brown
PAM / RLS / Power Internal Mirror / Heated Seats Relay Coil / USB Charger / WCPM /
DTV / ESL / HCPM
F50 7.5 Amp Brown ORC
Interior Fuse Box Location
254 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F51 7.5 Amp Brown
HCP / Reverse Gear / Filter Diesel SNSR / A/C Compressor / HVAC / Defrosting / Right
Head lamp Leveling / Left Headlamp Leveling / LDW / Alarm Mod / Airbag Psg / PIM /
Trailer Tow Mod / AFLM / Air Quality Sensor / ASBM / Headlamp Leveling
F53 7.5 Amp Brown ALU / EPB / BrakePedalSW NO / EMCM / TBM / DSCM / IPC
F94 15 Amp Blue Power Outlet
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit
— If Equipped
To access the fuses, remove the access door from the
left rear panel in the rear cargo area.
The fuses may be contained in two units. Fuse Holder
No. 1 is located closest to the rear of the vehicle and
Fuse Holder No. 2 (If equipped with trailer towing) is
located closest to the front of the vehicle.
Rear Fuse Access Door Location
Rear Cargo Fuse Cavity Example
1 — Fuse Holder No. 1
2 — Fuse Holder No. 2
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 255
8
Fuse Holder No. 1
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F1 20 Amp Yellow Sunroof*
F2 – –
F3 30 Amp Green Power Liftgate Module (PLGM)
F4 5 Amp Tan Driver And Passenger Ventilated Seats (HMSM*)
F5 25 Amp Clear Heating And Memory Drive Seat Module 1
F6 10 Amp Red Heating And Memory Drive Seat Module 2
F7 7.5 Amp Brown Driver And Passenger Lumbar Regulator (Without HMSM)
F8 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Seat SW (HMSM*)
Fuse Holder No. 2
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F3 5 Amp Tan Hands-Free Power Liftgate (HFRM)
F4 7.5 Amp Brown Damping Control Module
F5 5 Amp Tan Changeover Valve Feed (ELCM)
F8 7.5 Amp Brown Damping Control Module
On the Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit bracket, there is a Maxi Fuse holder for the Amplifier (if equipped).
Cavity Maxi Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 30 Amp Green Amplifier*
256 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part
Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this sec-
tion includes bulb description and replacement part
numbers.
Interior Bulbs
The Interior lights are LED, for replacement of any LED
lamps, see an authorized dealer.
Exterior Bulbs
The exterior lights are LED, for replacement of any LED
lamps, see an authorized dealer.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the follow-
ing information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Num-
bers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures,
and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard
have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from
this tire size designation. Example:
215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall pre-
ceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 257
8
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
•
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
•
"R" means radial construction, or
•
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
•
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
•
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
•
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
258 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side,
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
•
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
01 means the year 2001
•
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The
maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Manufacturer recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equip-
ment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 259
8
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to
the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
LOADING
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if
you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold
tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire And Load-
ing Information Placard
page 141.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Ratings (GAWR) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded
page 141.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
260 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
•
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-
tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
8
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
262 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
•
Safety
•
Fuel Economy
•
Tread Wear
•
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
•
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
•
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
•
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause
the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side
door.
At least once a month:
•
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgment when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated.
•
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary
with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in
mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi
(21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal
pressure buildup or your tire pressure will be too low.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 263
8
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced
vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle
operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe oper-
ating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires
could cause them to fail. You could have a serious
collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maxi-
mum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
•
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
•
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
•
The puncture is no greater than ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size
and service description (Load Index and Speed Sym-
bol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not
designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of infla-
tion pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to
as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when
the tire inflation pressure is at or below 14 psi (96 kPa).
Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced
immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a
Run Flat tire is changed after being driven under a Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition, please replace the
TPMS sensor as it is not designed to be reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle
on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
For more information
page 179.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do
not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping
page 226.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds con-
tinuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone
near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires should
be replaced.
Tire Tread
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
264 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When
the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced
page 265.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying fac-
tors including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style.
•
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across
the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will
reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
•
Distance driven.
•
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
The Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
manufacturer strongly recommends using tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed
page 264. Refer to
the Tire And Loading Information Placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index and
Speed Symbol of a tire
page 257.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely
affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and
wheels may change suspension dimensions and
performance characteristics, resulting in changes
to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress
to steering and suspension components. You could
lose control and have a collision resulting in seri-
ous injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller Load Index or
capacity other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller Load
Index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
8
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different All Season tires. All Season tires can
be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation
on the tire sidewall. Use All Season tires only in sets of
four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry con-
ditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on
ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C)
or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more infor-
mation, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation
or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can
be identified by a mountain/snowflake sym-
bol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size
and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect
the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized
tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire
page 217.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
a compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire desig-
nated for temporary emergency use
page 145.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped
Tire And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the
tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this
option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recom-
mended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the let-
ter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a con-
ventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare
tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire
and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
266 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full-Size Spare — If Equipped
The Full-Size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire
on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tempo-
rary use Full-Size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since
it is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and rein-
stall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use
spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the
same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driv-
er’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equip-
ment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on
your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of
vehicle control.
TIRE ROTATION
RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate
at different loads and perform different steering, han-
dling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they
wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute
to a smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 230.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not
be reversed.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on
each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause
damage to the power transfer unit. Tire rotation
schedule should be followed to balance tire wear.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 267
8
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must con-
form to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
tive performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart signifi-
cantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and
climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These
grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement, as measured
under controlled conditions on speci-
fied government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat,
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive tem-
perature can lead to sudden tire fail-
ure. The grade C corresponds to a level
of performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labora-
tory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
268 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Exces-
sive speed, underinflation, or exces-
sive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE — GAS
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following steps
to minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
•
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with Stop/Start system
then disconnect both the main and supplemental
negative battery cables.
•
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of ser-
vice (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system
is started again.
•
If assistance is needed to disconnect the battery
system, see an authorized dealer
NOTE:
When the vehicle has not been started or driven for at
least 30 days, an “Extended Park Starting Procedure” is
required to start the vehicle
page 98.
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative terminals
to the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition
switch in the OFF position and close the driver’s door.
When reconnecting the positive and negative termi-
nals to the battery be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF position and the driver’s door is closed.
STORING THE VEHICLE — PHEV
If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a
month, observe the following precautions:
•
Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy
location with the windows open slightly.
•
Check that the parking brake is not engaged.
•
Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery
post and be sure that the battery is fully charged.
During storage check battery charge quarterly.
NOTE:
Disconnecting the 12 Volt battery will prevent the
High Voltage (HV) battery from accepting a charge
from the Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE).
Also, the vehicle will not condition the HV battery (if
needed and connected to a powered EVSE). If the
HV battery is not able to condition itself and it
becomes cold enough (or hot enough), the vehicle
will not start until the HV battery’s cell temperatures
are between -22°F (-30°C) and 122°F (50°C).
•
If you do not disconnect the battery from the electri-
cal system, check the battery charge every 30 days.
•
Whenever you leave the vehicle stationary for two
weeks or more, idle the vehicle for approximately
five minutes, with the air conditioning system on
and high fan speed. This will ensure proper lubrica-
tion of the system, thus minimizing the possibility of
damage to the compressor when the vehicle is put
back into operation.
•
Plug in the vehicle when not using it whenever
possible.
NOTE:
The hybrid has a feature of periodic wake-up that
occurs every three weeks. This feature charges the
12 Volt battery from the HV battery. This will happen as
long as the HV battery remains above the minimum
state of charge
page 100.
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative terminals
to the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition
switch in the OFF position and close the driver’s door.
When reconnecting the positive and negative termi-
nals to the battery be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF position and the driver’s door is closed.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 269
8
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
AGENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other sea-
sons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.
Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is
operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other
extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint,
metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corro-
sion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY
MAINTENANCE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their
luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the
same soap solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the sur-
faces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt
ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or
sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage
the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and auto-
matic car washes may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of
tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to
prevent damage to the wheels. Select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap is recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to
remove the water droplets from the brake components.
This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors
and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Or Low Gloss Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
maintain this finish.
270 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and there-
fore different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the
lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a
mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely
with water.
•
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accu-
mulated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen
Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to pro-
tect your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch
the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
NOTE:
When using an automatic car wash with your hybrid
vehicle, do not exceed four passengers plus 88lb
(40kg) when you are at full payload, as this could cause
interference with the car wash mechanism.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept
clear and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or simi-
lar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as
possible.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertiliz-
ers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials
are well packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon
as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up
paint to match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply Mopar® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and
remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply Mopar® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 271
8
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical sol-
vents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the
belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do
not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if
you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Pro-
gram facility for inspection.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
•
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away
immediately.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regu-
lar cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of
dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather
upholstery and should be removed promptly with a
damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with
a soft cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to
clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show
any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more
so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and the manufacturer recommends Mopar®
total care leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean
the leather seats as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or ketone-
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery,
as damage to the upholstery may result.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive
type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
272 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the wind-
shield and is visible from outside of the vehicle.
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost
for any reason (for example, repeated brake applica-
tions with the engine off), the brakes will still function.
However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be
much greater than that required with the power system
operating.
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa-
bility, the remaining system will still function with some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
by increased pedal travel during application and greater
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the
malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
fluid in the master cylinder drops, the Brake Warning
Light will illuminate.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the Brake Warning Light on is
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking perfor-
mance or vehicle stability during braking may occur. It
will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make
your vehicle harder to control. You could have a colli-
sion. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
88.5 ft-lb
(120 N·m)
M12 x 1.25 17 mm
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
First tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened to 14.7 ft-lb (20 N·m).
Then repeat the operation until each lug nut/bolt has
been tightened to 88.5 ft-lb (120 N·m). Ensure that the
socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not
insert it halfway).
Vehicle Identification Number
Wheel Mounting Surface
273
9
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to
be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly
tightened.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the
engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the
engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see a
dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
recommended octane number can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
1.3L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all emission
regulations, and provide satisfactory fuel
economy and performance, when using high-
quality unleaded regular gasoline having an
octane rating of 87, as specified by the
(R+M)/2 Method.
The use of a 91 or higher octane premium gasoline will
allow these engines to operate to optimal performance.
This increase in performance is most noticeable in hot
weather or other heavier load conditions, such as
towing.
2.0L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions requirements, and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance, when using
high-quality unleaded regular gasoline hav-
ing an octane rating of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane premium
gasoline will allow these engines to operate to optimal
performance. This increase in performance is most
noticeable in hot weather or under heavy load condi-
tions such as while towing.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner-
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Use of these blends may result in starting and driv-
ability problems, damage critical fuel system compo-
nents, cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as
they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains
greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing
methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 USAGE IN NON-FLEX FUEL
VEHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
•
Operate in a lean mode.
•
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
•
Poor engine performance.
•
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
•
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
Torque Pattern
274 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
MODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Com-
pressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
system components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
MANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT)
IN GASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that
is blended into some gasolines to increase octane.
Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance
advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system perfor-
mance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-
mends that gasoline without MMT be used in your
vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indi-
cated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask
the gasoline retailer whether or not his/her gasoline
contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corro-
sion and stability additives are recommended. Using
gasolines that have these additives will help improve
fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to fur-
ther aide in minimizing engine and fuel sys-
tem deposits. When available, the usage of
TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials intended
for gum and varnish removal may contain active sol-
vents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel sys-
tem gasket and diaphragm materials.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
formance and damage the emissions control
system.
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most
of these products contain high concentrations of
methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 275
9
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.0L Engine 13.5 gal 51 L
1.3L Engine 11.2 gal 42.5L
Engine Oil With Filter
1.3L Engine 5qt 4.74L
2.0L Engine 5 qt 4.73 L
Cooling System*
1.3L Engine 5.9 qt 5.6 L
1.3L Battery/Power Electronics Coolant (Contact an authorized dealer for service) 7.4 qt 7.0 L
2.0L Engine 7 qt 6.6 L
2.0L Engine Low Temp 2.3qt 2.17L
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
276 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine, Battery, and Power Electric Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Miles (240,000 Kilometers) For-
mula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material Stan-
dard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 1.3L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-30 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of
the manufacturer Material Standard MS-13340. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-30 engine oil can be
used but must have the API Starburst trademark
page 235.
Engine Oil – 2.0L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® API SP/GF-6A Certified SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets
the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-13340. Equivalent full synthetic 5W-30 API
SP engine oil can be used but must have the API Donut trademark
page 235.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended API SP/GF-6A or equivalent oil can cause engine damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Fuel Selection – 1.3L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 2.0L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol.
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
6-Speed Automatic Transmission PHEV – If Equipped
Use only Mopar® AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may
affect the function or performance of your transmission.
9-Speed Automatic Transmission Gas – If Equipped
Use only Mopar® ZF8&9Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the
correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped We recommend using Mopar® Front Axle/PTU Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped We recommend using Mopar® Rear Axle/RDM Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 4 (TUTELA TOP EVO).
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 277
9
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's ser-
vice history. This can often provide a clue to the current
problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let
the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle (additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements
when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally inter-
ested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with
our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high qual-
ity service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed cor-
rectly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you
are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or
owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if
you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable
to resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's
Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer center
should include the following information:
•
Owner's name and address
•
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
•
Authorized dealer name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-855-299-1368 or visit alfaromeo.rsahelp.com
(USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if you
are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside Assis-
tance services last for four years, regardless of mileage,
calculated from the start date of the Basic Limited War-
ranty, as set forth in Warranty Information book.
1
1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc.,
Medford, MA 02155, except in AK, CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where ser-
vices are provided by Cross Country Motor Club of California, Inc.,
Thousand Oaks, CA 91360.
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of
gas/fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing
as a result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free:
USA: 1-855-299-1368/Canada: 1-800-363-4869. Pro-
vide your name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
required for covered services, license plate number,
and your location, including the telephone number from
which you are calling. Briefly describe the nature of the
problem and answer a few simple questions. You will be
given the name of the service provider and an esti-
mated time of arrival. If you feel you are in an “unsafe
situation”, please let us know. With your consent, we
will contact local police or safety authorities.
278
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you
may submit your original receipts from the licensed tow-
ing or service facility for services rendered within
30 days of the occurrence. Be sure to include your VIN,
odometer mileage at the time of service, and current
mailing address. We will process the claim based on
vehicle and service eligibility. If eligible, we will reim-
burse you for the reasonable amount actually paid,
based on the usual and customary charges for that ser-
vice in the area where they were provided. FCA US LLC’s
determination relating to reimbursement is final. Corre-
spondence should be mailed to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any
time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to
restrictions and conditions of use, which are deter-
mined solely by FCA US LLC.
Flat Tire Service
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch
a service provider to install your vehicle’s temporary
spare tire (if equipped) as recommended in your Own-
er’s Manual. This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home. We
will dispatch a service provider to deliver a small
amount of fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you to a
nearby station. This service is limited to two occur-
rences in a 12-month period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen
locks are keeping you from getting on your way, help is
just a phone call away. This service is limited to provid-
ing access to the vehicle’s seating area. It does not
cover the cost of replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and confi-
dence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a result of a
mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance will dis-
patch a towing service to transport your vehicle to the
closest authorized Alfa Romeo dealer.
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA (1-844-253-2872)
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CARE
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English/(800)
387-9983 French
ALFA ROMEO CUSTOMER CARE
(PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN
ISLANDS)
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919–1857
Phone: 844–253–2872
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, CDMX
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN
ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan, Puerto Rico, 00919-1857
Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA (1-844-253-2872)
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
HEARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA
US LLC has installed special Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a Conventional Teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with FCA
US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 279
10
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service
offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users,
dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to
connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans
are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans autho-
rized, endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If
you purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you
will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification
Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle deliv-
ery date. If you have any questions about the service
contract, call FCA US LLC’s Service Contract National
Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
For Canadian residents, you may have purchased addi-
tional coverage with an extended service contract. FCA
Canada Inc. stands fully behind its service contracts.
Be sure that the one you buy is a genuine Canada Inc.
service contract. We are not responsible for other com-
panies’ contracts. If you purchased a contract other
than a genuine FCA Canada Inc. service contract and
you have a problem, you will have to contact the admin-
istrator of that contract for resolution. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the FCA's Ser-
vice Contract National Customer Hotline at (800) 465-
2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
Mopar Vehicle Protection Plans offer valuable protec-
tion against repair costs after your vehicle warranties
have expired. Mopar Vehicle Protection plans are the
ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide addi-
tional protection beyond your vehicle's warranty.
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract
you may have purchased from another manufacturer. If
you require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools,
and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted
with the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provi-
sions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market. Refer to
www.alfaromeousa.com/owners for further information.
In Canada:
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provi-
sions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market. Refer to
www.alfaromeo.ca/en/my-alfa for further information.
For french-speaking citizens, please refer to
www.alfaromeo.ca/fr/mon-alfa for further information.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep
it operating at its best and maintain its original
condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
WASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or
cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US
LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in indi-
vidual problems between you, an
authorized dealer, or FCA US LLC.
Scan me
280 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department immedi-
ately. Canadian customers who wish to
report a safety defect to the Canadian
government should contact Transport
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investi-
gations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
ORDERING AND ACCESSING ADDITIONAL
OWNER’S INFORMATION
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a com-
plete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or
components and is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make
it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step trouble-
shooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic
tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order a digital copy of your Service or Diagnostic Pro-
cedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.alfaromeousa.com/owners/owners-service-manual
(US) or
www.alfaromeo.ca/en/owners/owners-service-manual
(Canada).
Or visit:
www.techauthority.com to order physical copies of
Owner’s Manuals (US).
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty Infor-
mation Books can be ordered through Archway at:
•
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have
changed your address, please provide the following
information and mail to:
FCAUSLLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
•
Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
•
Vehicle Identification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
•
Exact Odometer Reading
•
First and Last Name
•
Phone Number
•
Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
•
Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 281
10
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle.
Radio
The following regulatory statement applies to RADIO
devices equipped in this vehicle:
FCC ID: 2AHPN-BE2857
ISED ID: 6434C-BE2857
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innova-
tion, Science and Economic Development applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation
est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouil-
lage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. Es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. Este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
RF Exposure Requirements
To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance require-
ments, the device must be installed and operated to
provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all
persons.
This equipment complies with Canada radiation expo-
sure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with
minimum distance 20 cm between the radiator and
your body.
Key Fob Model FI7PE
US FCC - 2ADPXFI7PE
Canada IC - 12548A-FI7PE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innova-
tion, Science and Economic Development applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation
est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouil-
lage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. Es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. Este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
RF Exposure Requirements
To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance require-
ments, the device must be installed and operated to
provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all
persons.
This equipment complies with Canada radiation expo-
sure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with
minimum distance 20 cm between the radiator and
your body.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition
aux rayonnements ISED établies pour un environne-
ment non contrôlé. Cet équipement doit être installé et
utilisé avec un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la
source de rayonnement et votre corps
REMARQUE: Des changements ou des modifications
n’ayant pas été expressément approuvés par la partie
responsable de la conformité pourraient révoquer
l’autorisation d’utilisation de l’équipement.
282 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
DASM
US:
FCC ID: NF3-FR5CPCCF
HVIN: FR5CPCCF
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Op-
eration is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This
device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications made to this equipment not
expressly approved by Robert BOSCH GmbH may void
the FCC authorization to operate this equipment. This
equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to
Part15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his
own expense. Radiofrequency radiation exposure Infor-
mation: This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environ-
ment. This equipment should be installed and operated
with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator
and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
CANADA
IC:3387A-FR5CPCCF
HVIN: FR5CPCCF
PMN: Front Radar 5 Car Plus CAN CAN Flexray
This device complies with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation issubject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) this device must not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference, including interference that may causeunde-
sired operation of the device.Le present appareil est
conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux
appareilsradio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l'appareil
ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de
l'appareil doit acceptertout brouillage radioelectrique
subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible
d'encompromettre le fonctionnement.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING SYSTEM:
US:
FCC ID: WU877V12CRN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation issubject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this devicemust accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion. CAUTION TOUSERS Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void theuser`s authority to operate the
equipment.
CANADA
IC: 8436B – 77V12CRN
This device contains license-exempt transmitter(s)/
receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada’s license-exempt
RSS(s). Operation is subjectto the following two condi-
tions: (1) This device may not cause interference. (2)
This device must accept anyinterference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.L’Emetteur/re cepteur exempt de licence con-
tenu dans le pre sent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Innovation,Sciences et De veloppement e conomique
Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence.L’exploitation est autorise e aux deux conditions
suivantes: 1) L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage;2) L’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioe
lectrique subi, me me si le brouillage est susceptible
d’encompromettre le fonctionnement.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 283
10
INDEX
A
Active Driving Assist System ............122
Active Speed Limiter................113
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ...........114
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .........241
AddingFuel....................139
Additives,Fuel...................275
AirBag......................189
Air Bag Operation ...............190
Air Bag Warning Light ...........189,191
Driver Knee Air Bag ..............194
Enhanced Accident Response ......196,229
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ..........229
FrontAirBag .................191
If Deployment Occurs .............196
Knee Impact Bolsters .............194
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ........198
Maintenance .................198
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .......189
Side Air Bags .................194
Transporting Pets ...............207
AirBagLight.................189,208
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)....236
Air Conditioner Maintenance ............237
Air Conditioner Refrigerant.............237
Air Conditioner System...............237
Air Conditioning...................62
Air Conditioning Filter .............65, 237
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ...........65
AirFilter......................236
Air Pressure
Tires .....................263
Alarm
Panic......................32
Security Alarm .................90
Alfa Active Suspension (AAS) ............111
Alfa DNA System .................109
Alfa DNA System (Dynamic Car Control System). . .110
All Wheel Drive
Towing ....................228
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ............108,228
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle .....................9
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........241,276
Disposal ...................242
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...........169
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...............91
Assist, Hill Start ..................172
Audio Systems (Radio)...............149
AutoDownPowerWindows.............70
AutoHold.....................103
Auto Liftgate Fault Warning Light ..........90
AutomaticDimmingMirror .............51
Automatic Door Locks................43
Automatic Headlights ................57
Automatic High Beams ...............57
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ........65
Automatic Transaxle ................104
Automatic Transmission ..............105
AddingFluid ...............244,277
Fluid And Filter Change ............244
Fluid Change .................244
Fluid Level Check ...............243
FluidType ................244,277
Special Additives ...............243
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .......68
AxleFluid.....................277
Axle
Lubrication ..................277
B
Battery ....................15,234
Charging ....................18
Charging System Light .............88
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ..........33
Battery Saver Feature................86
Belts, Seat ....................208
BlindSpotMonitoring...............173
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...........238
B-Pillar Location..................260
Brake Assist System ................170
Brake Control System, Electronic..........169
Brake Fluid ....................277
Brake System ................243,273
Anti-Lock (ABS) ................273
Fluid Check ...............243,277
Master Cylinder ................243
Parking....................101
Warning Light ..................88
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...........105
Brightness, Interior Lights ............59, 60
Bulb Replacement.................257
Bulbs,Light....................209
C
Camera, Rear ...................135
Capacities, Fuel ..................276
Caps, Filler
Fuel......................138
Oil (Engine) ..................232
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..........241
Carbon Monoxide Warning.............209
Cargo Tie-Downs ..................78
284
Car Washes ....................271
Cellular Phone ..................168
Certification Label .................141
Change Oil Indicator ................82
Changing A Flat Tire ................213
Charging ......................18
Chart, Tire Sizing .................258
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . . .96
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..........207
Checks, Safety ..................207
Child Restraint ..................199
Child Restraints
Booster Seats .................201
Child Seat Installation .............206
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .....205
Infant And Child Restraints ...........200
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ....202
Older Children And Child Restraints ......200
Seating Positions ...............201
Child Safety Locks .................44
Clean Air Gasoline .................274
Cleaning
Wheels ....................270
Windshield Wiper Blades ...........238
Climate Control ...................62
Automatic ...................62
Compact Spare Tire ................266
Connector
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .......67
Console ......................66
Floor......................66
Contract, Service .................280
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ........241
Cooling System ..................240
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........241
Coolant Level ..............240,242
Cooling Capacity ................276
Disposal Of Used Coolant ...........242
Drain, Flush, And Refill .............240
Inspection ...................242
PointsToRemember .............242
Pressure Cap .................241
Radiator Cap .................241
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . .241, 276, 277
Cornering Lights ..................58
Corrosion Protection ................270
Cruise Light ....................94
Customer Assistance ...............278
Cybersecurity ...................149
D
Daytime Running Lights ...............57
Defroster, Windshield ...............208
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ..................234
Disabled Vehicle Towing ..............227
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........242
Door Ajar ....................88,89
Door Ajar Light .................88,89
Door Locks .....................40
Dead Lock Device ................43
Passive Entry ..................41
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water.....................147
E
Electrical Power Outlets ...............68
Electric Brake Control System ...........169
Anti-Lock Brake System ............169
Traction Control System ..........172,173
Electric Parking Brake ...............101
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........171
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light.......89
Emergency Braking ................178
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ...........224
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ............210
Jacking ....................213
Jump Starting ..............220, 222
Towing ....................227
Emission Control System Maintenance .......96
Engine ......................232
Air Cleaner ..................236
Break-In Recommendations ..........101
Checking Oil Level ...............234
Compartment.................233
Compartment Identification ..........233
Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............277
Cooling....................240
Exhaust Gas Caution .............209
Fails To Start ..................99
Flooded, Starting ................99
Fuel Requirements ...............274
Jump Starting ..............220, 222
Oil .................235, 276, 277
Oil Filler Cap .................232
OilFilter....................236
Oil Selection ...............235, 276
Oil Synthetic .................235
Overheating ..................225
Starting ..................98,100
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ....196,229
Ethanol ......................274
Exhaust Gas Cautions ...............209
Exhaust System ...............209, 239
Exterior Lighting ..................56
Exterior Lights .................56,209
INDEX 285
11
F
Filters
Air Cleaner ..................236
Air Conditioning ..............65,237
Engine Oil ...................236
Engine Oil Disposal ..............235
Flashers
Hazard Warning ................210
Turn Signals ..............58,95,209
Flash-To-Pass ....................57
Flat Tire Changing ..............257,266
FlatTireStowage...............257,266
Flooded Engine Starting ..............99
Floor Console....................66
Fluid, Brake ....................277
Fluid Capacities ..................276
Fluid Leaks ....................209
Fluid Level Checks
Brake .....................243
Engine Oil ...................234
Fold-Flat Seats ...................46
Folding Rear Seats .................46
Forward Collision Warning .............176
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ..............226
Fuel........................274
Adding ....................139
Additives ...................275
CleanAir ...................274
Ethanol ....................274
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ..............138
Gasoline ...................274
Light......................92
Materials Added ................275
Methanol ...................274
Octane Rating ..............274,277
Specifications .................277
Tank Capacity .................276
Fueling......................139
Fuses .......................244
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) .........53
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap)..............138
Gasoline, Clean Air ................274
Gasoline, (Fuel) ..................274
Gasoline, Reformulated ..............274
Gear Ranges ...................105
Gear Selector Override ..............225
Gear Shift Indicator .................84
Glass Cleaning ..................272
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............142
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ............142
GVWR.......................141
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water ................147
Hazard Warning Flashers .............210
Headlights .....................56
Automatic ...................57
Cleaning ...................271
Delay......................58
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ......57
Lights On Reminder ...............58
OnWithWipers.................57
Passing .....................57
Switch .....................56
TimeDelay...................58
Head Restraints ..................49
Head Rests.....................49
Heated Mirrors .................51,53
Heated Seats ....................47
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch....57
High Voltage Battery ................15
Hill Start Assist ..................172
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) .........53
Hood Release ...................73
I
Idle Coasting ....................95
Ignition.......................35
Switch .....................35
InsideRearviewMirror...............210
Instrument Cluster .............79,80,82
Descriptions ..................80
Display.....................80
Driver Assist ..................85
MenuItems ..................84
Messages ...................86
Instrument Cluster Display
Locations and Controls .............80
Navigation ...................85
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ..........272
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control System .....121
Intelligent Speed Assist System ..........114
Interior Appearance Care .............271
Interior Fuses ...................254
Interior Lights ...................59
iPod/USB/MP3 Control...............67
J
Jacking And Tire Changing If Equipped ....213
Jacking Instructions ................214
Jack Location ...................213
Jack Operation ................213,214
Jump Starting ................220, 222
286 INDEX
K
Key Fob
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........34
Remote Keyless Entry ..............31
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .33
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ....34
KeylessEnter'nGo™..............31,41
Keys........................31
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals ...........58
Lane Change Assist .................58
LaneSense ....................133
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................183
Latches ......................209
Hood ......................73
Leaks, Fluid ....................209
LifeOfTires....................265
Liftgate .......................74
Hands-Free ...................76
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ...........62
LightBulbs....................209
Lights.......................209
Active Speed Limiter Fault ............91
Active Speed Limiter SET ............94
AirBag................87,189,208
Anti Lock Brake System .............91
Automatic Headlights ..............57
Automatic High Beam ..........57,94,95
Battery Charge .................88
Battery Saver ................58, 60
Brake Assist Warning .............172
Brake Warning .................88
Bulb Replacement ...............257
Cornering ....................58
Cruise .....................94
Daytime Running ................57
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ............59
Door Open ...................88
Drowsiness Detected ..............88
Electric Power Steering Fault ..........88
Electronic Park Brake ..............91
Electronic Stability Control ............91
Electronic Throttle Control ............89
Engine Temperature ..............89
Exterior....................209
Fog.......................58
Forward Collision Warning ............94
FuelCutoff...................91
Fuel Level Sensor Fail ..............91
Headlights ...................56
Headlights On With Wipers ...........57
Headlight Switch ................56
High Beam .................57,95
High Beam/Low Beam Select ..........57
Hood Open ...................89
Icy Road Condition ...............94
Intensity Control ..............59,60
Interior.....................59
LaneSense .................91,92
Liftgate Open ..................89
Lights On Reminder ...............58
LowFuel....................92
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ......92
Oil Pressure ..................89
Oil Temperature ................89
Park ....................94,95
Passing .....................
57
Seat Belt Reminder ...............90
Security Alarm .................90
Service....................257
Service Forward Collision Warning ........92
Service Stop Start ...............92
Stop Start Active ................95
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ......92, 179
Towing Hook Breakdown ............93
Traction Control ................172
Transmission Temperature ...........93
Turn Signals ............56, 58, 95, 209
VanityMirror ..................51
Loading Vehicle ..................141
Tires .....................260
Locks
AutoUnlock ..................43
Child Protection .................44
Power Door ...................41
Low Tire Pressure System .............179
Lubrication, Body .................238
Lug Nuts/Bolts ..................273
M
Maintenance ....................73
Maintenance Free Battery .............234
Maintenance Schedule ..............230
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .....92
Manual
Service....................281
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ..........45
Memory Seat ....................45
MemorySettings..................45
Methanol .....................274
Mirrors.......................51
AutomaticDimming...............51
Heated ...................51,53
Outside .....................51
Rearview .................51,210
Vanity .....................51
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle .....................9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...........179
INDEX 287
11
Mopar Parts ...................280
Multi-Function Control Lever.............56
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ............101
O
Occupant Restraints................182
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ........274,277
Oil, Engine ..................235, 277
Capacity ....................276
Checking ...................234
Dipstick ....................234
Disposal ...................235
Filter .....................236
Filter Disposal .................235
Identification Logo ...............235
Materials Added To ..............235
Pressure Warning Light .............89
Recommendation ............235, 276
Synthetic ...................235
Viscosity ...................276
Oil Filter, Change .................236
Oil Filter, Selection ................236
Oil Pressure Light ..................89
Onboard Diagnostic System .............96
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ................281
Outlet
Power .....................68
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..............51
Overheating, Engine ................225
P
Paddle Shifters ..................107
Paint Care.....................270
PanicAlarm ....................32
Parking Brake ...................101
ParkSense
FrontAndRear ................125
ParkSense Active Park Assist ...........129
ParkSense System ................125
Pedestrian Warning System ............178
Performance .................85,167
Pets .......................207
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......260
Power
Door Locks ...................41
Liftgate .....................75
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ........68
Outside Mirrors .................52
Seats .....................46
Sunroof .....................71
Windows....................70
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ..........187
Premium Instrument Cluster
..........80
Preparation For Jacking ..............213
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ...................187
ProfileSettings..................151
Programmable Features ..............149
R
Radial Ply Tires ..................264
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ........241
Radio
Settings....................149
Sound Setting .................161
Radio Operation ..................168
Radio Remote Controls ..............166
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ............61
RearCamera...................135
RearCrossPath..................175
Rear Seats, Folding .................46
Rear Wiper/Washer.................62
Recreational Towing ................146
Reformulated Gasoline ..............274
Refrigerant ....................237
Release, Hood ...................73
Reminder, Lights On ................58
Reminder, Seat Belt ................182
Remote Control
Starting System .................37
Remote Keyless Entry................31
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........34
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control .......166
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .............38
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . .39
Uconnect Settings ...............39
Remote Starting System ..............37
Removable Rear Shelf ...............77
Replacement Tires ................265
Reporting Safety Defects .............280
Restraints, Child..................199
Restraints, Head ..................49
Roll Over Warning ..................8
Rotation, Tires ..................267
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle............208
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...........209
Safety Defects, Reporting .............280
Safety, Exhaust Gas ................209
SafetyInformation,Tire..............257
288 INDEX
SafetyTips....................207
Scheduled Cabin Conditioning ...........39
Schedule, Maintenance ..............230
Seat Belt Reminder .................90
Seat Belts ..................182,208
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ............185
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .....185
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .185
Child Restraints ................199
Energy Management Feature .........187
Extender ...................187
Front Seat .............182,183,184
Inspection ..................208
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .........184
Lap/Shoulder Belts ..............183
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .........185
Operating Instructions .............184
Pregnant Women ...............187
Pretensioners .................187
Rear Seat ...................183
Reminder ...................182
Seat Belt Extender ...............187
Seat Belt Pretensioner .............187
Untwisting Procedure .............185
Seat Belts Maintenance ..............272
Seats .......................46
Head Restraints ................49
Heated .....................47
Memory ....................45
Power .....................46
RearFolding ..................46
Seatback Release ...............46
Tilting .....................46
Ventilated ...................48
Security Alarm ...................90
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........277
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..............34
Service Assistance ................278
Service Contract .................280
Service Manuals .................281
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ............105
Shift Lever Override ................225
Shoulder Belts ..................183
Side Distance Warning...............127
Side View Mirror Adjustment ............51
Signals, Turn ...............58,95,209
SnowTires....................266
Spare Tires .................266, 267
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ................277
Oil ......................277
Speedometer....................85
Starting ..................37,98,100
Automatic Transmission .............98
Button .....................35
Engine Fails To Start ..............99
Remote.....................37
Starting And Operating ............
98,100
Starting Procedures ..............98,100
Steering
TiltColumn...................44
Wheel, Heated ...............44,45
Wheel, Tilt ...................44
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...........166
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . .166
Storage ......................66
Storage, Vehicle ................65,269
StoringYourVehicle................269
Stuck, Freeing...................226
SunRoof....................71,73
SunVisor......................51
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .....189
Surround View Camera System ..........136
Synthetic Engine Oil ................235
System, Remote Starting ..............37
T
Telescoping Steering Column ............44
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........65
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ...............78
Tilt Steering Column ................44
Time Delay
Headlight ....................58
Tire And Loading Information Placard .......260
Tire Inflator Kit — If Equipped
.........217
TireMarkings...................257
Tires...............209, 263, 266, 268
Aging (Life Of Tires) ..............265
Air Pressure ..................263
Changing ...................213
Compact Spare ................266
General Information ...........263, 266
High Speed ..................264
Inflation Pressure ...............263
Jacking ....................213
LifeOfTires..................265
Load Capacity .................260
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ....92,179
Quality Grading ................268
Radial ....................264
Replacement .................265
Rotation ...................267
Safety..................257,263
Sizes .....................258
SnowTires ..................266
Spare Tires ...............266, 267
Spinning ...................264
TrailerTowing.................145
Tread Wear Indicators .............264
Wheel Nut Torque ...............273
TireSafetyInformation ..............257
TireServiceKit..................217
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...........144
INDEX 289
11
To Open Hood ...................73
Towing......................142
Disabled Vehicle ................227
Guide.....................143
Recreational .................146
Weight ....................143
Towing Behind A Motorhome ............146
TowingEyes....................228
Traction ......................147
Traction Control ...............172,173
Traffic Sign Recognition System ........93, 120
TrailerTowing...................142
Minimum Requirements ............144
Tips......................146
Trailer And Tongue Weight ...........144
Wiring.....................145
TrailerTowingGuide................143
TrailerWeight...................143
Transaxle
Automatic...................104
Operation ...................104
Transfer Case
Fluid .....................277
Transmission ...................105
Automatic ................105,243
Fluid .....................277
Maintenance .................243
Transporting Pets .................207
Tread Wear Indicators ...............264
Turn Signals ..................58, 95
U
Uconnect Settings .................149
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ............268
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector ....67
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) If
Equipped
.................53
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ..........185
V
VanityMirrors....................51
Vehicle Loading ...............141,260
Vehicle Maintenance ...............235
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...........9
VehicleSettings..................149
Vehicle Storage ................65,269
Ventilated Seats ..................48
VoiceCommand..................50
Voice Recognition System (VR) ...........50
W
Warnings, Roll Over .................8
Warranty Information
.............280
Washers, Windshield .............60,234
Washing Vehicle ..................271
Water
Driving Through ................147
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ............270
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim.............270
WindBuffeting...................71
Window Fogging ..................65
Windows......................70
Close......................70
Down......................70
Open ......................70
Power .....................70
Up.......................70
Windshield Defroster ...............208
Windshield Washers..............60,234
Fluid .....................234
Windshield Wiper Blades .............238
Windshield Wipers .................60
Wipers Blade Replacement ............238
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ...............61
Wireless Charging Pad ...............69
290 INDEX
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This
manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them
on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o󰀨-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine
except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-855-299-1368 OR VISIT ALFAROMEO.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and conditions of use, that are
determined solely by FCA US LLC.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any
device or feature that may take their attention o󰀨 the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers,
portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious
accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself unable to
devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o󰀨 the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit
the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Alfa Romeo
brand vehicle and to provide a
convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.alfaromeousa.com (USA),
www.alfaromeo.ca (Canada) or your local Alfa Romeo brand dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
Owner Handbook, Radio Instruction Manual and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 844-253-2872 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend,
or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
DID_5666916_24b_Tonale_ICE_PHEV_OM_EN_070223.indd 2DID_5666916_24b_Tonale_ICE_PHEV_OM_EN_070223.indd 2 7/2/2023 5:46:55 PM7/2/2023 5:46:55 PM
2024 OWNER’S MANUAL
2024 TONALE
Fourth Edition
24_GC_GH_OM_EN_USC
©2023 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A.,
used with permission. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of your Alfa Romeo brand
vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google
Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “Alfa Romeo” (U.S. residents only).
USA
alfaromeousa.com/
owners/owners-service-manual
Canada
alfaromeo.ca/en/
owners/owners-service-manual
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
DID_5666916_24b_Tonale_ICE_PHEV_OM_EN_070223.indd 1DID_5666916_24b_Tonale_ICE_PHEV_OM_EN_070223.indd 1 7/2/2023 5:46:55 PM7/2/2023 5:46:55 PM